336
QuickView™ Reference Manual Product Version 12.1.1 HF4 October 2013

QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    5

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView™ Reference Manual

Product Version 12.1.1 HF4 October 2013

Page 2: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

© 2013 Cadence Design Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.Printed in the United States of America.

Cadence Design Systems, Inc. (Cadence), 2655 Seely Ave., San Jose, CA 95134, USA.

1. The following license applies to zlib LICENSE /* zlib.h -- interface of the 'zlib' general purpose compression library version 1.2.3, July 18th, 2005 Copyright (C) 1995-2005 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or impliedwarranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software. Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions: 1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required. 2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software. 3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution. Jean-loup Gailly [email protected] Mark Adler [email protected]

2. The following license applies to bzip2 LICENSE "bzip2", the associated library "libbzip2", and all documentation, are copyright (C) 1996-2007 Julian R Seward. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required. 3. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software. 4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Julian Seward, [email protected] bzip2/libbzip2 version 1.0.5 of 10 December 2007

Trademarks: Trademarks and service marks of Cadence Design Systems, Inc. contained in this document are attributed to Cadence with the appropriate symbol. For queries regarding Cadence’s trademarks, contact the corporate legal department at the address shown above or call 800.862.4522. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

Restricted Permission: This publication is protected by copyright law and international treaties and contains trade secrets and proprietary information owned by Cadence. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this publication, or any portion of it, may result in civil and criminal penalties. Except as specified in this permission statement, this publication may not be copied, reproduced, modified, published, uploaded, posted, transmitted, or distributed in any way, without prior written permission from Cadence. Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers permission to print one (1) hard copy of this publication subject to the following conditions:

3. The publication may be used only in accordance with a written agreement between Cadence and its customer.

4. The publication may not be modified in any way. 5. Any authorized copy of the publication or portion thereof must include all original copyright,

trademark, and other proprietary notices and this permission statement.

Page 3: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

6. The information contained in this document cannot be used in the development of like products or software, whether for internal or external use, and shall not be used for the benefit of any other party, whether or not for consideration.

Disclaimer: Information in this publication is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Cadence. Except as may be explicitly set forth in such agreement, Cadence does not make, and expressly disclaims, any representations or warranties as to the completeness, accuracy or usefulness of the information contained in this document. Cadence does not warrant that use of such information will not infringe any third party rights, nor does Cadence assume any liability for damages or costs of any kind that may result from use of such information.

Restricted Rights: Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR52.227-14 and DFAR252.227-7013 et seq. or its successor

Page 4: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers
Page 5: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

Contents

About This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Document Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

1Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

The Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Invoking QuickView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Opening Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Using the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Using Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Using Windows and Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

The Drawing Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22The Select Viewer Data Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24The Data Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25The Parameters Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27The Color Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27The Information and Errors Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27The Command Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Log Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

2The Main Drawing Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Status Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Pull-down Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Individual Menu Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Context Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

October 2013 5 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 6: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Rulers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

3Opening and Preparing Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Opening Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Using Index Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Closing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Temporarily Disabeling A Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

4Data Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Format Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Layout Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Job Decks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Setting Draw Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Visible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Draw Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Opaque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Orientation and Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Global Highlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Data Palette Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63More . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

The Color System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

October 2013 6 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 7: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

Basic Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71The Color Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Making Color Cells Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Fade Overlap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

5Multiple Drawing Windows & Data Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Multiple Data Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Supported Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Selecting The Data Palette Id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Data Palette Ids With Multiple Drawing Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Hiding Databases For Different Data Palette Ids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Drawing Window Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Drawing Window Synchronization Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

6Technology Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Creating A Technology Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Saving A Technology Definition From The Data Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Importing Virtuoso Technology Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Importing PVS Rule File Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Applying A Technology Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Match By Name/Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96The Default Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Specifying A Default Load Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Technology Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Current Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Managing Saved Technology Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Global Technology Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Its Just A Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

October 2013 7 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 8: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

7Drawing and Examining Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Window Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Draw Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Fit Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Redraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111You can open the System Parameters menu from the Main Drawing window through the Parameters pull-down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Pan/Zoom Tool (Pan To Point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Query and Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Quick Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Corners, Edges and Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Multi Edge Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Sessions Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123View History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Saved States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126X State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Multi Cell/Object Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Cells/Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Groups Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Patterns and Job Decks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Job Patterns and Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Arbitrary Overlap and Double Fetch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Spot Mode and Virtual Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Layout Database Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

October 2013 8 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 9: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

Selective Display Forms and Steppers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Cell Display Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Layer Display Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Text Display Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Instance Property Form and the Geometry Property Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

8Viewing Layout Database Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Opening a Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Memory Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Culling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Library Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Layer Names and Initial Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Data Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

9Working With Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

The Image Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Overlaying Image Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Image Data Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Resizing Image Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Auto Alignment Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Fit Into Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Align With Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

10Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

The Connectivity Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Extracting A Connectivity Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163The Net Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Exporting Nets To External Geometrical Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Point To Point Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

October 2013 9 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 10: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

11Database Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Database Merge Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Input Databases - (Cells) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Output Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Merging Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Database Convert Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Input Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Output Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Layer Mapping Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Converting The Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Database Stream Replace Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Cell Replacement Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Running Stream Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

12Viewing Job Decks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

MEBES and CORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Parsing Job Decks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Parse Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Parse Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Parse Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Parse Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183General Parse Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184MEBES Parse Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185CORE Parse Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Pattern Directory Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Job Deck Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Title Size and Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

October 2013 10 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 11: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

MEBES Title Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188CORE Label Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

13Save and Restore Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Saving and Restoring Window Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Saving and Restoring Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Saving and Restoring System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Saving and Restoring MEBES Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Saving and Replaying Command Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Restoring Draw Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

14System Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

The Command Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197The Command Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198QuickView Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Reading a Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Recording a Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Debugging Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

The Info and Errors Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Journal Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204QUEL Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Create or Modify a Hot Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Delete a current hot key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

15Editing GDSII Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Enabling The QuickView Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Starting The Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Specifying The Database To Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

October 2013 11 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 12: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

Edit In Place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Unselect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Stretch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Flatten Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223New Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223New Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Properties Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Polygon Properties Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Path Properties Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

16MaskCompose Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Starting The Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Identifying The MaskCompose Project/Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Selecting A Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Output Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Output File Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Stepper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Stepper Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

AEnvironment Variable Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

BHot Key Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Hot Keys by Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Hot Keys by Letter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

October 2013 12 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 13: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

CParameter Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Crosshairs & Grid Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Data Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Mouse Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Units & Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

GDSII Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Current Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Library Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Read Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

GDS Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Extract Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278ASCII Dump- Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282ASCII Dump - Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

OASIS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Current Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Library Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Read Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Oasis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Extract Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

GL1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Current Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Library Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Cache And Culling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Command Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

October 2013 13 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 14: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

Read Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Alphameric Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

LAFF Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Current Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Library Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Cache And Culling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Command Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Read Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

LEF/DEF Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Current Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Read Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307LEFDEF Init File Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Pattern and Job Deck Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310M Ch H J T Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Hitachi Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312JEOL Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313MEBES General Options Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Job Parse Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Job Pattern Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Job Title Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

DContext Menu Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Current Item Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Main Drawing Context Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Global Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Data Specific Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

EMacro Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

October 2013 14 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 15: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

About This Manual

This manual documents and describes QuickView™, the Cadence Design Systems stand-alone data viewing tool.

Audience

The manual is written primarily for those who are not yet familiar with QuickView. You will be able to quickly and easily obtain the basic information and direction you need as they begin using the tool.

It is also written for more experienced users who need information about features that they are not yet familiar with, or who need to refresh their memory of the details of the tool’s operation.

There are no particular prerequisites for the use of the tool and manual although it is assumed that users have some knowledge of layout databases (GDSII™, GL1, LAFF, Open Access and OASIS) and/or patterns and job decks (MEBES®, Hitachi, JEOL, Toshiba, VSB11 & VSB12).

Document Structure

The Table of Contents, along with this section, About This Manual, familiarizes you with the structure and purpose of this document.

Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” provides an introduction to the product and the user interface.

Chapter 2, “The Main Drawing Window,” describes the Main Drawing window as the principal window for viewing data, launching commands and displaying status information.

Chapter 3, “Opening and Preparing Data,” provides detailed instructions for selecting (loading) layout, pattern and job deck data for viewing, and explains how to assign colors and other draw attributes to the data which you select.

Chapter 6, “Technology Definitions,” provides detailed information and instructions for working with, importing, and editing QuickView Technology Definitions.

October 2013 15 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 16: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualAbout This Manual

Chapter 7, “Drawing and Examining Data,” explains all aspects of drawing data and analysis commands including query, measure and description.

Chapter 8, “Viewing Layout Database Data,” provides in-depth information about specifics of viewing mask layout data. It supplements the more general information in Chapter 3 and Chapter 7.

Chapter 9, “Working With Images,” provides detailed infomraion and isntructions for working with image files and the image file manager for overlaying image files with geometrical data.

Chapter 12, “Viewing Job Decks,” provides in-depth information about specifics of viewing job decks. It also supplements the more general information in Chapter 3 and Chapter 4.

Chapter 4, “Data Palette,” provides an in-depth description of the QuickView color system.

Chapter 13, “Save and Restore Operations,” describes all save and restore operations supported by QuickView. It is partially a repeat of information presented earlier.

Chapter 14, “System Operations,” is an introduction to the QuickView executive system. It describes the Command window and provides information on the use of macros and hot keys.

Eight appendices provide supplementary information.

Appendix A, “Environment Variable Reference,” lists environment variables recognized by QuickView. For some commonly used variables it is a repeat of information presented earlier.

Appendix B, “Hot Key Reference,” lists default hot key definitions which are supplied with QuickView and relates them to commands which are otherwise invoked from menus.

Appendix C, “Parameter Reference,” lists system and layout and pattern data options and parameters by menu. It is a compilation of information presented earlier.

Appendix D, “Context Menu Reference,” lists all commands on the standard Tracking menus in menu order and provides a brief explanation of each command. It is a repeat of information presented earlier.

Appendix E, “Macro Reference,” lists macros which are supplied with QuickView. For the more commonly used macros it is a repeat of information presented earlier.

October 2013 16 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 17: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualAbout This Manual

Related Documents

The following documents are related to the QuickView data viewing tool.

■ Installation Notes

■ Product Notes

■ Application Notes

October 2013 17 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 18: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualAbout This Manual

October 2013 18 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 19: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

1Getting Started

Welcome to QuickView™, the Cadence Design Systems stand-alone data viewing tool.

The Product

QuickView is the Cadence Design Systems stand-alone data viewing tool. It allows you to draw, examine, compare and validate integrated circuit (IC) data in various layout and pattern data formats.

QuickView uses proprietary high capacity, high performance algorithms to draw data directly from the layout and/or pattern data files.

QuickView allows you to view patterns, job decks and layout libraries individually and in combination. Flexibility in assigning drawing colors and fill patterns allows you to obtain the appearance and contrasts you desire.

QuickView provides flexibility in customizing the display environment and user interface.

Environment Variables

QuickView and other Cadence Design Systems products recognize certain environment variables. One of these, K2_VIEWER_HOME, must be set before you can invoke Quickview.

If /xxx/yyy/zzz is the pathname of a directory where Cadence products are installed, you can set K2_VIEWER_HOME by typing: setenv K2_VIEWER_HOME /xxx/yyy/zzz.

Other QuickView environment variables are automatically set for you or are optional. You may wish to set or reset one or more of them to adapt QuickView to your viewing needs. For a list of QuickView environment variables, see Appendix A, “Environment Variable Reference”.

You may wish to preset K2_VIEWER_HOME and perhaps other environment variables in a shell startup file such as .cshrc or .profile.

October 2013 19 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 20: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualGetting Started

Note: Though there are many types of shells available for use in Unix-type operating systems, the C-shell and its variants are more common in engineering environments. Most of the examples in this manual will be confined to C-shell syntax.

Invoking QuickView

After setting K2_VIEWER_HOME and other environment variables, if desired, you can invoke QuickView by typing:

% $K2_VIEWER_HOME/bin/k2_viewer

You may wish to alias $K2_VIEWER_HOME/bin/k2_viewer to a more convenient token in your .cshrc file or elsewhere. For example: alias $K2_VIEWER_HOME/bin/k2_viewer qv

When you invoke QuickView one window appears on your screen.

Opening Data

In general, opening data is done by simply selecting one or more data files using the Open option located under the File menu in the Main Drawing Window. The open option will present you with a file browser which you can used to navigate your file system in order to access the geometrical data that you want to view in QuickView. In most cases QuickView will be able to automatically detect the format of the data that you have selected and handle it accordingly.

There is more information with resect to opening an viewing data in Chapter 3, “Opening and Preparing Data,” Chapter 8, “Viewing Layout Database Data,” and Chapter 12, “Viewing Job Decks.”

Using the Mouse

As you use QuickView, you will use the mouse to perform various operations. Some of these operations may be familiar to you.

In the drawing areas, the mouse buttons have specific uses:

■ The mouse left button (ML, for Mouse-Left) initiates panning and zooming.

■ The mouse middle button (MM, for Mouse-Middle) selects points, areas and objects.

■ The mouse right button (MR, for Mouse-Right) invokes the context menu and terminates commands.

October 2013 20 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 21: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualGetting Started

Other mouse operations are preformed with ML or by simply moving the mouse:

■ Press a toggle or push button by moving the cursor to the button and clicking ML.

■ Select from an option button or pull-down menu by pressing and holding ML on the button or menu label to display the selections. Then move the cursor to the desired selection and release ML.

■ Activate a text field by moving the cursor into the field. The field accepts keyboard input while the cursor is in the field.

■ Select (highlight) items in a scroll list by clicking on or dragging across the items with ML. Select additional items, if desired and allowed, with <shift> ML.

■ When using hot keys (see next topic), position the cursor in the Main Drawing window or at a required location before pressing the key.

For some operations, the shift key is used with mouse buttons.

Note: To redefine mouse button settings see Mouse Buttons under System Parameters in Appendix C, “Parameter Reference.”

Using Hot Keys

Many operations that can be performed with the mouse can also be assigned to hot keys. The use of hot keys is a matter of convenience and preference. If there are operations which you perform routinely or frequently, you will probably find it advantageous to use hot keys.

A set of default hot key definitions is provided with QuickView. You can define additional or different hot keys if you wish.

When active, hot keys are “hot” while the cursor is in the Main Drawing window. Some hot keys require concurrent positioning of the cursor to identify an object displayed in that window.

For instructions on activating the default hot keys or on defining new hot keys, see Hot Keys in Chapter 14, “System Operations.”

Appendix B, “Hot Key Reference,” lists the default hot keys. Individual hot keys are described there in terms of corresponding menu/mouse operations.

October 2013 21 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 22: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualGetting Started

Using Windows and Menus

In QuickView windows can be “docked” to the Main Drawing window for convenience. When you start QuickView, three windows, the Main Drawing window, the Data Palette and the Context window, appear in a single window. You can open other windows as needed.

If you wish to maximize your viewing area or otherwise configure your screen, feel free to resize or overlap windows. You may dismiss windows which you are temporarily not using by pressing the “X” in the Top Right Corner or by grabbing the window dressing with MR and unchecking the box next to the Window’s name.

The remainder of this chapter introduces the principal QuickView windows.

The Drawing Windows

Figure 1-1 The Main Drawing Window

October 2013 22 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 23: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualGetting Started

Two drawing windows, the Main Drawing window and the Context window, appear on your screen when you invoke QuickView. You can also open either window or bring it forward from the View pull-down Main Window.

The Main Drawing window is the main viewing area for data. The Context window provides a second viewing area.

The Context window is often used to maintain an overall or global, view of data as you examine it in detail in the Main Drawing window. A superimposed rectangle identifies the subset of the Context window display which is currently drawn in the Main Drawing window.

The main window displays the current format’s processing status in the upper right corner. Note the spinner in the UR corner. This spinner “spins” if any of the formats are processing. To view which format is currently working, right click on the spinner. If the formats are working, they will have a spinner next to the format’s name, if not, they will have a check box. Unchecking this box will disable the drawing for that format.

The Main Drawing window is also used to launch commands, access secondary menus and display status information. For a complete description of these functions, see Chapter 2, “The Main Drawing Window.”

October 2013 23 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 24: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualGetting Started

Second and Third Drawing Windows

Figure 1-2 Second And Third Drawing Windows

The viewer supports second and third drawing windows that allow for measuring different locations of a database without the need of Panning and Zooming over large areas. You access these windows through the View Pull-down menu.

It is important to note that this feature does not support loading data in one window and not another, e.g. windows may not have different top cells from a gds file.

The Select Viewer Data Window

The Select Viewer Data Window is used to select data for viewing.

October 2013 24 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 25: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualGetting Started

Figure 1-3 Open File Browser

Using this window, you can access directories where layout database, pattern or job deck data is located and select the file or files that you wish to view.

You can open the Select Viewer Data Window by choosing Select Data on the File pull-down of the Main Drawing window, on the icon found on the Main Drawing Window toolbar, or by using the ‘s’ hot key while the Main Drawing window is active.

The Data Palette

The Data Palette displays and maintains the QuickView draw list.

October 2013 25 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 26: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualGetting Started

Figure 1-4 Data Palette

The draw list is a list of patterns, job decks and layout database files which you have selected for viewing. You can add items to the draw list through the Select Viewer Data window. There are also commands which delete items from the draw list. See Chapter 3, “Opening and Preparing Data.”

The draw list also shows current draw attributes for each item. Draw attributes indicate whether or not items are “visible” and, if visible, what their appearance, location and size should be when drawn. Context menus in the draw list and buttons at the bottom allow you to select and assign draw attributes. See Setting Draw Attributes in Chapter 3, “Opening and Preparing Data.”

QuickView draw commands use the draw list to determine which data to draw and how to draw it. See Draw Commands in Chapter 7, “Drawing and Examining Data.”

The Data Palette is opened when you start QuickView. It can be found on the View->Windows pull-down of the Main Drawing window or by using the ‘d’ hot key.

October 2013 26 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 27: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualGetting Started

The Parameters Menus

Parameters menus allow you to select options and parameters which control many aspects of data selection, preparation and viewing.

There are several parameters menus, one for System parameters and others for QuickView’s supported formats. The parameters menus can be opened from the Parameters pull-downs of the Main Drawing window.

Individual options and parameters are explained at various points throughout this manual. For a list of parameters arranged by menu, see Appendix C, “Parameter Reference.”

The Color Selector

The Color Selector maintains the QuickView color system.

Figure 1-5

You can use this window, when needed, to examine and modify color system definitions in order to obtain the appearance and contrasts that you require for your viewing tasks. See Color under Setting Draw Attributes in Chapter 4, “Data Palette.”

You can open the Color Selector from color selector button on the Bottom left of the Data Palette.

The Information and Errors Window

The Information and Errors window serves as a text display area.

October 2013 27 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 28: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualGetting Started

Figure 1-6 The Information And Errors Window

The Information and Errors window displays text information such as MEBES pattern descriptions, GDSII geometry statistics and executive system status. It also displays many error and warning messages, especially those which exceed a single line.

You can open the Information and Errors window from the View -> Windows pull-down of the Main Drawing window. The Information and Errors window opens automatically when you invoke commands which generate text.

October 2013 28 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 29: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualGetting Started

The Command Window

Figure 1-7 The Command Window

The Command window provides command line access to QuickView executive operations and supports macro reading and writing. This functionality is useful in adapting QuickView to specific viewing needs. See The Command Window and other topics in Chapter 14, “System Operations.”

You can open the Command window from the View->Windows pull-down of the Main Drawing.

Log Window

When you run a Chameleon job from the viewer or when you do a System command from the viewer, the output goes to the Log window. This prevents verbose output from cluttering the Info and Errors window.

October 2013 29 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 30: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualGetting Started

October 2013 30 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 31: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

2The Main Drawing Window

The Main Drawing window is the principal QuickView window. It appears automatically when you invoke QuickView.

Because of the central role which this window plays in all QuickView operations, it is described in detail in this early section of the manual. As you read this chapter for the first time, you may wish to concentrate on the main points and then refer back to it later for specific details as needed.

The use of the Main Drawing window as the principal QuickView drawing area is described in Chapter 7, “Drawing and Examining Data.”

Status Lines

One purpose of the Main Drawing window is to provide status information. The Main Drawing window displays status information in three status lines, two near the top of the window and one at the bottom. Some status items also function as buttons.

Figure 2-1 Status Lines

October 2013 31 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 32: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualThe Main Drawing Window

Pull-down Menus

Figure 2-2 Pull-down Menus

The Main Drawing Window has several pull-down menus.

Table 2-1 Status Line Details

Item Description

Cursor Position The X and Y cursor position value indicate the current cursor position in microns.

Message Field The main message field is a multi purpose text field where various messages are posted depending on the current activities of the user. For example it may reflect information about the status of a database being loaded into QuickView or the primary results of a recent measurement.

Drawing Window Options

The drawing window options icon provide access to a set of options for the associated drawing window like synchronization and data palette state.

Busy Indicator or Spinner

The busy indicator will be animated when QuickView is working on a task in the background.

User Interaction Prompt When the user initiates a drawing window interaction a prompt will appear in the top left corner of the associated drawing window. These prompts provide limited instructions and hints to assist the user.

Active Databases Toolbar

The active databases tool bar is located at the bottom of the Main Drawing Window and it will contain buttons for each loaded layout databases. Clicking on a database button will set it as the current database for tools and actions that only apply to the current database and automatically scroll the Data Palette to display its database header. Additionally right clicking on an active database button provides additional controls related to the associated database.

October 2013 32 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 33: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualThe Main Drawing Window

Individual Menu Details

File

Table 2-2 Pull-down Menus

Menu Description

File The file menu provide access to actions like opening and closing databases, selecting a specific cell to view, reading a macro, or exiting QuickView.

View The view menu provides access to actions that control what is displayed in the different drawing windows.

Parameters The parameters menu provide access to the different parameters windows.

Tools The tools menu provides quick access to the most common tools like the sessions and technology managers.

Measure The measure menu provides access to the different measuring capability available in QuickView

Windows The windows menu provides options for controlling the which windows and toolbars are visible.

Help The help menu provides access to the available documentation as well as information about the current QuickView version.

Table 2-3 File Menu

Option Description

Open Displays the file browser used to load data into QuickView

Recent Data This fly-out menu lists recent items loaded into QuickView providing quick access to those databases if they need to be loaded into QuickView again.

Read Macro Displays the read macro dialog used to read QUEL macros. Some commonly used macros are described at various points in this manual and a list of macros supplied with QuickView is provided in Appendix E, “Macro Reference.”

October 2013 33 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 34: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualThe Main Drawing Window

View

Cell/Objects Allows you to change or close cells or objects for the databases that are currently loaded in QuickView

Close All Allows you to close data loaded into QuickView

Sessions Manager Displays the QuickView Sessions Manager which includes the primary View History, Bookmarks, and Data Palette States tools.

Exit Exits QuickView

Table 2-4 View Menu

Option Description

Fit Fits the currently loaded data to the drawing window.

Redraw Redraws the data for the current viewing area in the drawing window.

Zoom Provides controls to zoom in or out around the center of the current viewing area.

Pan To Point Displays the Pan To Point tool.

Point List Displays the Point List tool for loading and working with external user coordinate data.

History Displays the View History Tool in the QuickView Sessions Manager.

Bookmarks Displays the Bookmarks Tool In the Quickview Sessions Manager.

Background Allows you to set the background color for the drawing windows.

Clear Highlights Clears the various highlights that may have been added while interacting with the various data inspection tools.

Table 2-3 File Menu

Option Description

October 2013 34 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 35: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualThe Main Drawing Window

Parameters

Tools

Table 2-5 Parameters Menu

Option Description

System Displays the system parameters dialog.

GDSII, OASIS, ... Displays the associated layout format parameters dialogs.

MEBES, JEOL, ... Displays the associated fractured format parameters dialogs.

Table 2-6 Tools Menu

Option Description

Technology Manager Displays the QuickView technology manager for creating, editing, and importing QuickView technology definitions.

MDPV Displays the Mask Data Prep & Verification tool for performing XORs and other data preparation activities.

Replay Displays the QuickView replay tool.

Image Provide access to the Image Overlay and Save Image tools

GDSII, OASID, ... Provides access to data format specific tools like data extraction and report generation.

Stepper Allows you to show or clear the QuickView stepper.

DB Convert Displays the MaskCompose batch database conversion tool.

DB Merge Displays the MaskCompose batch database merge tool.

Stream Replace Displays the MaskCompose batch database stream replace tool.

Start Editor When available this option will enable the QuickView geometry editing capabilities and display the editor toolbar.

October 2013 35 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 36: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualThe Main Drawing Window

Measure

Tip

While the measure menu is initially more intuitive measuring with the m, e, v, h, c, & i hotkeys is more powerful, flexible, and productive.

Table 2-7 Measure Menu

Option Description

Measure Provides a general purpose measurement command which uses hot keys to modify the measurement locations: Edge - e, Horizontal edge - h, Vertical edge - v, Corner - c, Inter section -i, and Center - n. The intersection detection also locates corners and projections where the distances are short, and the intersecting edges are nearest to the location selected. In measuring from an edge to a corner, the report shows a DX, DY, and distance. The center of the edge is used for this calculation.

One Edge Used to select and describe a single shape edge.

Two Edges Used to select two shape edges and report the separation between them.

One Corner Used to select and describe a single shape corner.

Two Corners Used to select two shape corners and report the horizontal and vertical separation, along with the distance between them.

Find Center Used to identify the center of a particular shape by selecting one of the shapes edges.

Intersection Used to select and report the coordinate where two edges intersect.

Edge Separation Requires two or more formats to be displayed. From one point digitized it will find the 2 closest edges and report the difference in alignment between the two formats.

Loop On/Off toggle Sets the measurement command to loop unless specifically ended.

October 2013 36 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 37: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualThe Main Drawing Window

Windows

Tip

Right clicking in an empty area within the Main Window’s menu bar will provide a quick access context menu for displaying or hiding the different windows and toolbars.

Set Anchor Allows you to define an arbitrary origin point for the data. This is then used as the origin of the cursor position and commands that return coordinate results. A small red flag appears in the lower left of the main drawing window to indicate when an anchor point is currently applied.

Clear Anchor Removes the current anchor point if one is defined.

Point Measure Allows you to select two coordinates and it draws a dimension line in the drawing window showing the distance between them.

Multi-edge Measure Allows you to select a line in the drawing window that will be searched against to identify any database edges that intersect it. Each intersecting edge will be measured and marked up relative to any neighboring edges showing the relative edge separations.

Measure File Displays the Measure to File tool.

Figure Status Highlights one of the specified format’s trapezoid, pattern limit or substrate limit in the Main Drawing window and reports a description of it. in the Information and Errors window. Select a trapezoid or limit when prompted.

All Figure Status Finds the nearest data to a specified point for all open formats.

Table 2-8 Windows Menu

Option Description

Data Palette Displays the QuickView Data Palette.

Data Browser Displays the QuickView Data Browser.

Info and Errors Displays the QuickView Information and Errors Window.

Table 2-7 Measure Menu

Option Description

October 2013 37 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 38: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualThe Main Drawing Window

Help

Command Displays the QuickView Command Window.

Log Displays the QuickView Log Window.

Second, Third, Fourth, & Context

Displays the relative Drawing Window.

Toolbars This fly-out menu provides access to a list of options for displaying the different available toolbars for the current session.

Placement This fly-out menu provides a set of options for saving and loading different window layouts including the default window layout.

Tip

The ‘w’ and ‘W’ hotkeys will automatically cycle through the current list of available window layouts.

MaskCompose When QuickView is started by MaskCompose this option will be available under the Windows menu. Selecting this option will bring the associated MaskCompose Implementation module to the foreground.

Table 2-9 Help Menu

Option Description

About QuickView Displays the QuickView splash screen which contains information like the current QuickView version etc.

Validate System Runs a system check for compatibility and prints it in the Information and Errors window.

QuickView Help Starts the Cadence help viewer and displays the QuickView Reference Manual.

New Features Starts the Cadence help viewer and displays the What’s New document.

Table 2-8 Windows Menu

Option Description

October 2013 38 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 39: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualThe Main Drawing Window

Context Menus

Many Main Drawing window commands are available through the drawing areas right click context menu.

The individual context menu commands are explained in Chapter 7, “Drawing and Examining Data.” and Appendix D, “Context Menu Reference,” which lists all Context Menu commands in menu order and provides a brief description of each.

Toolbars

Toolbars give quick access to some of the most used functions in QuickView. When QuickView is started, you get two icon toolbars, the View and Utils toolbars.

View

Figure 2-3 View Toolbar

View Toolbar

Option Description

Open Displays the open file browser

Interrupt Halts the current action.

Fit Window Fits the current loaded data to the drawing window.

Redraw Window Redraws the current loaded data for the current viewing area.

Previous View Steps back to the previous viewing area in the view history.

Next View Steps forward to the next viewing area in the view history.

Zoom In Zooms in about the center of the current viewing area.

Zoom Out Zooms out about the center of the current viewing area.

October 2013 39 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 40: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualThe Main Drawing Window

Utilities

Figure 2-4 Utilities Toolbar

Rulers

In addition to the View and Utilities toolbars which are displayed by default the Rulers toolbar is also available when QuickView first starts up. The Rulers toolbar can be displayed through the Toolbars fly-out menu under the Windows menu in the Main Drawing Window.

View Toolbar

Option Description

Measure Initiates a multiple feature measurement similar to the ‘m’ hotkey or the measure option under the Measure pull-down menu.

Clear Highlights & Markups

Clears the current markups and drawing window highlights.

Drawing Font Displays the system drawing font selection dialog.

Pan To Point Displays the Pan to Point dialog.

Loop Toggles the measurement loop status On/Off.

Figure/Geometry Status Initiates the selection of figure or geometry to extract detailed information.

Instance Status Initiates the selection of a cell instance to extract detailed information.

Connectivity Displays the Connectivity Tool for highlighting and extracting connectivity in a design

Save Picture Saves the current Main Drawing area to an image file.

Add Bookmark Adds a bookmark for the current viewing area to the sessions manager bookmarks.

MaskCompose Tools When QuickView is able to determine that MaskCompose is installed the MaskCompose Tool icon is displayed which provides access to the QuickView MaskCompose Tools for working with MaskCompose output data.

October 2013 40 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 41: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualThe Main Drawing Window

Figure 2-5 Rulers Toolbar

There are other toolbars available as you load different data formats that give you the same functionality of the Tracking Menus in older versions of QuickView. For more information contact [email protected]

View Toolbar

Option Description

New Ruler Initiates the interaction for adding a new ruler in the drawing window(s).

Undo Removes rulers in the reverse order that the were added to the drawing window(s).

Clear All Rulers Removes all of the current rulers from the drawing window(s).

Modify Ruler Initiates the interaction for selecting and moving the end point of an existing ruler in the drawing window(s).

October 2013 41 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 42: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualThe Main Drawing Window

October 2013 42 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 43: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

3

Opening and Preparing Data

This chapter provides detailed information on selecting data for viewing. It also describes the Data Palette draw list and explains how to modify draw attributes, such as visiblity and color, to the data that you select.

Other preparatory steps, such as parsing job decks and opening cells, which are unique to job decks or layout database data, are explained in Chapter 8, “Viewing Layout Database Data,” or in Chapter 12, “Viewing Job Decks.”

October 2013 43 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 44: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualOpening and Preparing Data

Opening Data

Figure 3-1 Open File Browser

After invoking QuickView as explained in Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” you can select layout databases, patterns and job decks as follows:

1. Select Open under the File menu in the Main Drawing window or use the Open icon on the View Toolbar.

Tip

The ‘s’ hot key will also display the open file browser.

2. When the open file browser appears, browse to the directory where your data is located.

The buttons on the left provide quidk access to the commonly used directories such as your home directory. You can also set up buttons directing you to specific datatype directories using environment variables. For example a GDSII button is created if you set the K2_GDSII_DATA environment variable. See Appendix A, “Environment Variable Reference,” for more information.

October 2013 44 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 45: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualOpening and Preparing Data

3. When you locate the database file you wish to load select it and click the Open button to load it into QuickView.

Tip

Using a file name filter in the Directory and File Filter text field can help filter the data files available to you. Use the asterisk ‘*’ as a wildcard..

Tip

You can select and load multiple data files in the same directory by using a sfhit-click or control-click selections.

When you select a file, QuickView accesses the file and reads it for viewing. The status line will indicate the progress as the data is being loaded.

If an index file from a previous load exists QuickView can use it to dramatically reduce the overall load times. See Using Index Files below for more information.

When the datases is finally loaded a set of database file and load statistics is printed in the Information and Errors window.

If errors occur, messages are written to a popup error window and to the Information and Errors window. If an “out of memory” error message appears, see Memory Usage in Chapter 8, “Viewing Layout Database Data.”

Using Index Files

Index files significantly reduce the amount of time requried to load a database. After a database is loaded an index file can be created by selecting the Dtaa->Write Index option under the drawing window’s right click context menu. Index files are created under a directory that resides in the same location as the database for which the index file is created. The name of this directory is generally QV_indx.

Important

It is important to note that the index file cannot be used to load the data alone. The database must be in the same location as the Sub-directory.

October 2013 45 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 46: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualOpening and Preparing Data

Important

QuickView automatically checks the index file agains the original database to verify that it is still relevant. If the database file’s modified time is different from the one that was stored in the index file when it was created QuickView will ignore the index file and load the database directly.

Index files can aslo be created by using the write_index utility. See the write_index Application Note for instructions on how this can be used.

Closing Data

There are several ways to close patterns, job decks and Layout database files which you have selected for viewing. The following table identifies the most common mechanisms for closing data in QuickView

Temporarily Disabeling A Format

If you wish to disable all of the databases of a specific format without closing them use the context menu that is available when right clicking on the status spinner in the main drawing windows stats line. When a listed format is unchecked the it will be prevented from drawing any loaded data with associated format.

Table 3-1 Closing Databases

Close Action

Individual Databases Each individual database can be closed directly using the close icon located in the top right corner of its database header in the Data Palette.

All Databases The Close All -> Data option under the Main Drawing Window’s File menu will close all loaded databases. Alternatively the Shift-X hot key may be used as a short cut to close all loaded data.

All <Format> Databses The Close All -> <Format> options under the Main Drawing Window’s File menu will close all loaded databases with the specified format.

October 2013 46 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 47: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualOpening and Preparing Data

Figure 3-2 Disable Formtat Context Menu

October 2013 47 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 48: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualOpening and Preparing Data

October 2013 48 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 49: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

4Data Palette

Figure 4-1 Data Palette

The Data Palette lists the patterns, job decks and layout database files which you have opened for viewing. It serves as the cockpit for controlling individual database attributes like rotation, mirror, magnification, and offset along with individual layer attributes like visibility, color, and stipples.

October 2013 49 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 50: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

The Data Palette is automatically displayed when starting QuickView without any saved window layout preferences to the right of the Main Drawing area. It can always be accessed under the View->Window menu in the Main Drawing Window or using the ‘d’ hot key.

Entries are automatically added to the data palette for each database you open. Additionally layer names and colors are automatically assigned as well.

Important

QuickView does not require a technology definition to load any format.

Format Variations

Layout Databases

Figure 4-2 Data Palette For Layout

When you open a layout database file for viewing a three line database header is added to the Data Palette followed by a line for each layer identified in the associated database. A line

October 2013 50 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 51: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

named instances is added at the end of the layer list that controls the visibility of instance bounding boxes.

For the GDSII and GL1 formats only the layers that are drawn in the current cell will be displayed. When As the current viewing cell for a GDSII or GL1 database is changed the layer list for that database in the Data Palette will be automatically filtered to show only the layers that are drawn in that cell. This option can be disabled for any given database using the Database Parameters->View->Show All Layers menu option located at the top right corner of the database’s data header in the Data Palette.

The file names in the Main Drawing window active databases status line or toolbar also function as buttons. Clicking on one of these buttons will automatically scroll the Data Palette to show it associated database header.

Patterns

Figure 4-3 Draw List For Patterns

When you open a pattern file for viewing a three line database header is added to the Data Palette followed by a line for the chip or pattern boundary and a line for the patterns trapezoids or geometries.

October 2013 51 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 52: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

Job Decks

Figure 4-4 Draw List For Job Decks

When you open a job deck file for viewing a three line database header is added to the Data Palette followed by a line that marks the jobdeck substrate or boundary. After the substrate a line is added for each layer or level identified in the associated job deck.

When you select a job deck for viewing, three or more lines are added to the Data Palette draw list and a parse command is issued.

Tip

If a job deck includes M Titles, you can list levels either by level number or by M Title. See Identify Levels By under General Parse Options in Chapter 12, “Viewing Job Decks.”

There are also commands which list certain job deck patterns and pattern instances separately. These commands add lines to the Data Palette which show draw attributes for individual patterns and instances identified in the job deck. See Job Patterns and Instances under Patterns and Job Decks in Chapter 7, “Drawing and Examining Data.”

October 2013 52 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 53: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

Setting Draw Attributes

Draw attributes are values associated with items in the Data Palette draw list which indicate whether or not the items are visible and, if visible, what their appearance, size and location should be when drawn.

You may set or reset attribute values at any time:

1. Select (highlight) lines in the Data Palette draw list which are to receive attribute values.

a. Select a single line or a three line header with ML.

b. Select additional lines with <ctrl> ML.

c. Select adjacent lines by holding ML or <shift> ML while moving the cursor across them.

2. Select attribute values from the header Context Menu, the header options of the Data Palette and from the buttons at the bottom of that menu.

3. The selected values are assigned to highlighted lines if applicable.

You can use the arrow button found in the LL of each data header to display or hide all draw list lines.

If several patterns, job decks and/or layout database files are present in the draw list, you can scroll to a particular layout database file by selecting its name in the status line of the Main Drawing window. You can, of course, also scroll the draw list by moving the slider located at its right edge.

After you set draw attributes, you can reset the visible, color, drawn and text attributes to their initial values if desired. Reset attributes on specific lines by highlighting the lines and pressing Reset. Reset attributes for all lines of a pattern or job deck or for all lines of a layout database file in one drawing window by highlighting at least one line and pressing All Reset.

Visible

The visible attribute determines whether or not a file and its listed components (layers and/or levels) can be drawn, queried and measured. Any file or component which is not visible is ignored.

The visible attribute has two levels. Visible on a header line applies to the file as a whole. Visible on a listed component further controls the visibility of that component. Both the file and the component must be visible for data to be drawn or examined.

October 2013 53 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 54: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

The visible attribute value appears in the Data Palette column labeled Vis (Visible).

Set visible to Visible or Not Visible on individual lines by highlighting the lines and pressing Visible or Not Visible.

The other visibility buttons set visible to Yes and/or No on all lines of a “group” which has at least one highlighted line. Three groups are defined: a) all pattern and job deck header lines, b) all layout database header lines and c) all non-header lines under any one header line.

■ All Visible and All Not Vis assign the values Yes and No to all lines of a group which has at least one highlighted line.

■ Visible Only assigns the value Yes to highlighted lines and the value No to all other lines of the same group(s).

■ Only No Vis assigns the value No to highlighted lines and the value Yes to all other lines of the same group(s).

Note: You automatically set visible to Yes on any header line when you set any attribute (other than Visible No) on any non-header line pertaining to it. You also automatically set visible on any line when you set any other attribute on the same line.

Color

The color attribute, which appears on every non-header line, identifies the color to be used to draw data and text if it is visible.

When the attribute is visible, a sample of the color cell appears on the line. The sample appears as a swatch or as a box depending on the value of the drawn attribute on the same line.

Below the draw list, the Data Palette has several buttons which display color and pattern samples. You can select a color by pressing its button or, if the color is not shown, by clicking the arrow next to the last color button which will bring up a full list of colors. You can select a fill pattern by pressing its button or, if the pattern is not shown, by clicking the arrow next to the last pattern button which will bring up a full list of colors

You can also define color, fill pattern and line style by using the Color Selector window. For more information refer to Chapter 4, “Data Palette,”

Draw Mode

The draw mode attribute describes ways in which data can be drawn. There is a draw mode attribute in the fifth column of most non-header lines in the Data Palette. The values displayed

October 2013 54 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 55: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

in this column indicate how the data for the associated layer will be drawn. The most common draw mode optional are Fill and Outlines displayed as ‘Fil’ and ‘Out’ respectively.

The basic outline and fill draw modes may be applied or set using the buttons at the bottom of the Data Palette. This set of buttons contains several options in this respect.

Access to the more advanced Draw Modes is provided by right clicking on the fifth column of a selected Data Palette line which will display the Draw Mode Context Menu for the associated data format. The available options in this context menu will vary depending on the data base format associated with the Data Palette line used to access the Draw Mode Context Menu.

Figure 4-5 Advanced Draw Mode Context Menu Examples

Table 4-1 below lists the different draw mode options available under the advanced Draw Mode Context Menu along with a description and the short code that will be displayed in the fifth column of the Data Palette lines when it is applied.

Table 4-1 Standard Draw Mode Options

Option Code Description

Block Blk Draws a filled rectangle showing the pattern area.

Box Box Draws lines showing the pattern extent or substrate.

Stripe/Scan Str Draws lines showing pattern stripe or scan boundaries

October 2013 55 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 56: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

Tone

Each of the listed Draw Modes may have an additional tone modifier applied to it. The default tone is ‘Normal’ and when it is applied nothing special is displayed in the fifth column of the Data Palette lines and the data will draw as described for the Draw Modes listed above. When any other Tone modifier is applied an additional Draw Mode code will be displayed indicating the applied Tone modifier. The Tone modifiers are accessed through the advanced Draw Mode Context Menu described above. The available options in this context menu will vary depending on the data base format associated with the Data Palette line used to access the Draw Mode Context Menu.

Table 4-2 below lists the different Tone Modifier options available under the advanced Draw Mode Context Menu along with a description and the short code that will be displayed in the fifth column of the Data Palette lines when it is applied.

Outline Out Draws only the outline of the shapes.

Fill Fil Draw the shapes filled with the assigned fill pattern or color.

Outline And Box O/B Draws the content for both Outline and Box draw modes.

Outline And Stripe/Scan O/S Draws the content for both Outline and Stripe/Scan draw modes.

Fill And Box F/B Draws the content for both Fill and Box draw modes.

Fill And Stripe Scan F/S Draws the content for both Fill and Stripe/Scan draw modes.

Table 4-2 Draw Mode Tone Modifiers

Option Code Description

Normal Tone Draws the data in the specified Draw Mode without and modification and does not display any Tone code in the Data Palette Line

Table 4-1 Standard Draw Mode Options

Option Code Description

October 2013 56 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 57: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

Opaque

The opaque draw mode modifier will cause layers or levels to draw on top of other layers instead of being merged with the other drawn layers in the drawing window.

The last layer that the opaque draw mode modifier was applied to will be drawn on top of all other opaque layers. Any currently opaque layer can be brought to the front or top by selecting it and simply applying the Opaque draw mode modifier again. Alternatively when there are opaque layers being drawn for a specific database a pair of draw order icons will be added to the associated database header. These icons allow you to modify the draw order of a selected opaque layer by moving it up or down. The current draw order is also represented in the data palette because all opaque layers for a specific database are listed at the top of the layer list in the order that they are drawn from the top down.

Table 4-3 below lists the different Opaque Modifier options available under the advanced Draw Mode Context Menu along with a description and the short code that will be displayed in the fifth column of the Data Palette lines when it is applied.

Normal Tone Marked X-- Draws the data in the specified Draw Mode without and modification except it will mark each individual shape with an ‘X’ highlight.

Reverse Tone REV Draws the entire area marked by the current pattern, plate, or cell boundary except the areas where the actual shapes are located.

Reverse Tone Merged RVM Draws the entire area marked by the current pattern, plate, or cell boundary except the areas where the actual shapes are located. This is similar to the standard Reverse Tone option except that it will first merge any layers using the same color before calculating the reverse toned image.

Table 4-3 Draw Mode Opaque Modifiers

Option Code Description

Draw Opaque OPQ Draws the data in the specified Draw Mode without merging it with shapes on other layers in the database.

Table 4-2 Draw Mode Tone Modifiers

Option Code Description

October 2013 57 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 58: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

Text

The text attribute determines whether or not text should be visible when data is drawn. There is a text attribute on pattern and job deck header lines and on certain job deck and layout database non-header lines. A value, such as Yes or No, appears in the Data Palette column labeled Txt (Text).

On pattern and job deck header lines the text attribute determines whether or not pattern names (and the job deck name and slice code if a job deck) should be displayed at the lower left corner of the pattern (or substrate). Names are drawn as space allows.

On job deck level lines the text attribute controls the drawing of job deck titles. In this case, the value T/B (Text and Box) can also be selected. This value causes each title to be drawn in a box showing the maximum extent of the title field. The box is for viewing purposes only.

Layout database Instance lines have a text attribute. Instance “text” consists of a cell name and any attached properties. Layout database layer lines have a text attribute if the file has text on that layer.

Set the text attribute by pressing one of the text buttons. The six Text buttons assign the values Yes and No much like the six Visible buttons explained above. You can also set the text visibility for individual lines by MR on the Text column for each attribute line.

Orientation and Alignment

Figure 4-6 Rotation And Mirror Controls

Orientation and alignment attributes are draw attributes which specify orientation and location for individual files or orientation and alignment for multiple files. Each pattern, job deck and

layout database file has five orientation and alignment attributes which apply to both drawing windows: mirror/reflection, rotation, magnification, X offset and Y offset. You can get to these attributes by MR on each individual line on the data header you wish to modify.

October 2013 58 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 59: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

Orientation and alignment attributes provide flexibility in viewing individual files from various vantage points and in overlaying and comparing multiple files:

■ mirror/reflection allows you to generate a front or back view of your data.

■ rotation allows you to rotate data in increments of 90 degrees.

■ magnification allows you to change data size.

■ X offset and Y offset allow you to change data location.

Orientation and alignment attributes should generally be set in the order they are presented here: first mirror/reflection, then rotation, then magnification and finally offset. If you follow this sequence and if you redraw the data after each step, it should be clear at each point how to proceed. Only rarely will you need to set all five attributes.

When overlaying files, it is important to understand the relationship between them. For example:

■ If a GDSII layer which has its origin in the center is rotated 90 degrees and fractured at 5x, and if there is no other data manipulation, you can overlay the GDSII layer and the pattern and have fracture lines show as the only difference. If properly set, orientation and alignment attributes can make equivalent data appear identical.

■ If GDSII data is oversized, undersized or gridded in the fracture process, orientation and alignment attributes can be used to align the GDSII layer and the pattern but the geometry/trapezoid edges affected by the oversize, undersize or gridding operations necessarily diverge by predictable amounts.

Mirror/Reflection

The mirror/reflection attribute allows you to draw and examine data from the back as well as from the front.

The mirror/reflection attribute value Yes or No appears on the header line following the designation Mir: (Rotation/Mirror) for each header.

In keeping with MEBES and GDSII conventions, patterns and job decks mirror side to side. layout database data reflects top to bottom. Patterns and job decks mirror “in place,” i.e. about the midpoint of the data. layout database data reflects across its origin which may or may not be at its midpoint.

You can set mirror/reflection to Yes or No by highlighting header lines and MR on the Mirror value in the header. You will then get a selection box to choose the value.

October 2013 59 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 60: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

Rotation

The rotation attribute allows you to rotate data counter clockwise in increments of 90 degrees.

The rotation value 0, 90, 180 or 270 appears on the header line after the designation Rot: on each header line.

Layout database data rotates about its origin which may or may not be at its midpoint. pattern and job deck data rotate “in place,” i.e. the lower left corner of the rotated data occupies the same location as the lower left corner of the unrotated data.

You can set rotation to 0, 90, 180 or 270 by highlighting header lines and MR on the Rotation value in the header. You will then get a selection box to choose the value (options are 0, 90, 180 and 270).

Note: If both mirror/reflection and rotation are in effect, rotation is applied after mirror/reflection.

Magnification

Magnification is a scale factor that is applied to data as it is drawn or examined.

The magnification value appears on the header line after the designation Mag:. The value 1.00 indicates no magnification.

Layout database data is magnified from its origin which may be at its center or at some other location. Patterns and job decks are magnified from the lower left corner.

The magnification attribute is set by MR on the Magnification value in the data header and typing in the magnification value.

Note: If mirror/reflection and/or rotation are in effect, magnification applies after they are applied.

Offset

X and Y offset attributes specify the number of microns that data should be offset horizontally and/or vertically when it is drawn or examined.

The offset values appear on the header lines following the designations X: and Y:. Offset values may be positive, negative or zero.

Note: If mirror/reflection, and/or rotation and/or magnification are in effect, offsets apply last.

October 2013 60 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 61: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

Offset values are set by MR on the Offset value (X: or Y:) and typing in the offset value.

You can return both offset values to 0 by selecting Offset -> No on the Context menu for the header.

If you are comparing a MEBES pattern against GDSII data and the extent of the pattern and the GDSII data corresponds exactly, you can use a specialized alignment menu:

1. After setting mirror/reflection and/or rotation and/or magnification if necessary, redraw the data.

2. Open the Alignment Control window by reading a macro. Press Read Macro on the File pull-down of the Main Drawing window to open the Macros menu. Then select alignment_control and press Read.

3. Enter the GDSII layer number(s) that you wish the pattern to align to in the Layer: field. List multiple layers using commas for delimiters and hyphens for ranges.

4. Press Get Windows to obtain extent values for the GDSII layer(s) and the pattern. Wait for values to appear in all eight fields before proceeding.

If Show is On, QuickView displays the boundary of the extents that it finds.

5. Press Align Windows to align the pattern and GDSII layer(s).

Global Highlight

Global Highlight is designed to identify where shapes are being drawn even when the zoom level prevents them from being visible. The display window is divided into a grid, and only the grids which have data in them are drawn. Only the visible layers in a database are considered.

To turn on Global Highlighting, by MR on the GH value in the data header and choosing On or Off.

Figure 4-7 Global Highlight Controls

October 2013 61 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 62: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

The key word GH will indicate which database is being considered for Global Highlighting. Turn on the layers within that database to be considered.

To adjust the grid spacing for Global Highlights, bring up the Systems Parameters dialog found under the Tools menu in the main drawing window. Select the Highlight button. There you will find a slider to adjust the size of the grid (see Appendix C, “Parameter Reference,” for more information).

October 2013 62 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 63: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

Data Palette Tools

The bottom of the data palette consists of series of tabs with various different tools.

Important

Actions in the Data Palette tool only apply to selected database headers or layers. The selection is used as the target for any request to update attributes etc.

Drawing

The drawing tab contains items that related to layer or level drawing attributes. It provides convenient access to controls for setting color and fill patterns along with controls for quickly applying different visibility states.

Figure 4-8 Data Palette Drawing Tools Tab

The first two rows of icons will respectively update the color or fill pattern of any selected layers in the Data Palette. If the desired color or pattern is not available additional colors and patterns may be accessed using the red arrow buttons on the right or through the full color palette accessed using the large button on the left.

The bottom of the drawing tools tab consists of a series of buttons that will adjust the different visibility states for the selected layers. For example if you want to set all of the layers that are not selected to be not visible click the Visible Only button. This will automatically make any layers that are not selected not visible.

October 2013 63 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 64: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

More

The More tab provides tools for working with overall database attributes like rotation, mirror, offset, and magnification. Additionally this is were the fade overlap option and slider is located.

Figure 4-9 Data Palette More Tools Tab

Fade Overlap

The Fade Overlap slider in the More tab is useful for identifying the non overlapping areas in the drawing window.

Caution

For Fade Overlaps to work properly, all color cells should have a solid pattern. Also, the speed at which the Fade Overlaps work is determined by the speed of the hardware that is used.

October 2013 64 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 65: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

Figure 4-10 Fade Sliders on the Data Palette

To access this functionality, use the following steps:

1. Load the databases you want to compare the visual differences.

2. Turn on the visibility for the layers in question and fill them with a solid color.

3. To fade the overlap regions, click on the toggle next to the Fade Overlap slider.

4. Adjust the slider potion to adjust the amount which overlapping areas are faded.

October 2013 65 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 66: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

Figure 4-11 Overlaps Faded

Limitations

■ When using the fade overlap functionality, the drawing speed is affected. In order to get the best accuracy at high scale factors, some of the speed up functionality is turned off.

■ At lower zoom levels, the drawing accuracy for GDS and OASIS can be 1 pixel off causing a visual effect we call “Slivers”. This only occurs when comparing different formats like MEBES with GDS. Since they use different methods for drawing the data, at low zoom levels, you can have round off differences between formats which can lead to a 1 pixel display variance.

Mag, Offset X & Y

These text fields allow you to specify a value for each of the associated database attributes that can be applied to the selected database header(s). For example entering 100 into the X offset text field then clicking on the associated apply values icon will add 100 to the current X offset value for each database header that is currently selected. The advantage of these text fields over entering the value manual in each database header is that the values can be applied to multiple databases simultaneously and they will be maintained for application at a later time.

October 2013 66 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 67: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

Magnification Icons 1x, 4x, & 5x

These icons are convenient when you need to quickly set the magnification to one of these standard values.

Important

When applying the 4x and 5x icons to fracture formats they are applied as shrink values instead of scale values. For example the 4x icon will apply a .25 scale or magnification not 4.0.

Offset Icons

The select offset icon will initiate the interactive offset operation for the selected database header. The clear offset icon will set the X and Y offset values for the selected database headers to 0.0.

Global Highlight Icon

The global highlight icon will toggle the current global highlight setting for the selected database headers between On and Off.

Mirror Icon

The mirror icon will toggle the current mirror setting for the selected database headers between Yes and No

October 2013 67 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 68: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

Rotate Left & Right Icons

The rotate icons will add or subtract 90 degrees of rotation from the current rotation value in the selected database headers while staying within the range of {0, 90, 180, 270}.

Filter

The filter tab provides tools for showing and hiding layers in the selected database(s). When a database has a large number of layers this tool allows you to hide the layers that are not of interest at the current time. The application of the filter will be applied as the user interface reads. For example the filter shown in Figure 4-12 reads: “Show All Layers that have a layer Name that matches MET*”. This will be interpreted to mean that only layers that match will be shown and all other layers will be hidden.

Figure 4-12 Data Palette Filter Tools Tab

Base Operation

The filter operation will either show or hide the layers that are being considered. The first option button on the form is used to indicate the base operation. It has two options, Show and Hide, for defining this base operation which becomes the foundation for the overall filter operation.

Targeting

October 2013 68 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 69: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

After the base operation is identified the remainder of the form is used to define the final group of layers that will be assigned the state defined by the base operation. The second option button defines the base layer set that will be considered and it has the following options. Its value defines the complete base set of layers that the match will be applied to before applying the base operation.

Matching

When the base layer set is identified and the Match options are enabled then it will be reduced again to determine the final group of layers that the base operation will be applied to. If the match options are disabled then the base operation will be applied to every layer in the base layer set.

The matching options allow the user to reduce the base layer set, “All Layers” for example to a smaller set of layers. In the example illustrated in Figure 4-12 the All Layers base layer set is reduced to only the layers that match the string MET1*. After the matching is applied and the final group of layers is identified, all layers beginning with MET1 in this case, will have the base operation applied to them.

Tip

The asterisk ‘*’ may be used as a basic wild card character in the match string.

Table 4-4 Base Layer Set Option Button Values

Base Layer Set Description

All Layers All layers in the database will be considered.

Current Layers Only the layers that are currently shown as the result of previous filter operations will be considered.

Filtered Layers Only the layers that are currently hidden as the result of previous filter operations will be considered.

Visible Layers All layers that have their visibility attribute set to Yes and are drawing in the drawing windows will be considered.

Not Visible Layers All layers that have their visibility attribute set to No and are not drawing in the drawing windows will be considered.

October 2013 69 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 70: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

Applying The Base Operation

It is important to note the layers the base operation will be applied to is different when the Match operations are enabled then when they are not. when the match operation is not enabled, the base operation will apply to all of the layer in the database. For example if the user selected Hide, Not Visible Layers with out applying a match then the filter will be applied to every layer in the database, even those that may have been hidden, and only the visible layers will be shown. If however the match options were enabled, then the list of layers that the base operation will be applied to is reduced to only those in the base layer set. For example if the match was for layer 6, then only the layers that had a layer number of 6 would be hidden with in the set of layers that were not currently visible. That is if there were layers that had a number 6 that were currently visible they would not be hidden because they were not part of the base layer set.

October 2013 70 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 71: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

The Color System

The QuickView color system is designed to be both powerful and flexible so that you can easily obtain the appearance and contrasts that you need for your viewing tasks.

In many cases, you can use existing color cell definitions to successfully complete your viewing tasks without accessing internal color system definitions.

If additional or different appearances and contrasts are needed, this section provides a full explanation of the color system.

Figure 4-13 The Color Palette

Basic Concepts

The color system provides 140 colors, which you can use to generate layer display definitions. When drawing filled data, colors that are defined without a fill pattern are shown as solid colors with a line at the border. When drawing unfilled data, the same color cells generate border lines only.

The term color cell refers to a color/pattern/line combination that is defined, examined and adjusted through the Color Palette.

The Color Palette Windows

October 2013 71 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 72: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

The Color Palette

The Color Palette provides access to QuickView color system definitions. You can access the Color Palette and color system definitions at any time.

You can open the Color Palette by selecting the Colors Icon bottom right of the Data Palette. To change the color cell for a line, select that line in the Data Palette and click the Colors Icon.

Figure 4-14 Data Palette Color Controls

The Color Palette has three tabs:

1. The Color Tab

2. The Pattern Tab

3. The Line Tab

Located at the bottom of each page are two swatches, the one on the left shows the current color cell of the layer selected, the one on the right shows the new color cell. To modify the current color cell to the new color cell, click the Apply bottom found at the bottom of the page.

Selecting other lines in the Data Palette list will update the swatches to the color cell of the newly selected line and if multiple lines are selected, the last layer in the list will be shown. If no layers are selected, the swatches will default to red.

October 2013 72 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 73: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

Color Tab

Figure 4-15 Color Tab

The Color Tab displays 140 color choices for you to use to define a new color cell. Choose a color from the color selector by clicking on it. This should modify the new color cell on the bottom right of the window. Clicking Apply will update the color cell for the selected line(s) in the Data Palette.

October 2013 73 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 74: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

Pattern Tab

Figure 4-16 Pattern Tab

The Pattern Tab displays the predefined patterns plus any patterns that are defined in your ~/.cds_quickview/custom_bitmaps directory. Choose a pattern from the pattern selector by clicking on it. This should modify the new color cell on the bottom right of the window. Clicking Apply will update the color cell for the selected line(s) in the Data Palette.

You can create a custom pattern by clicking on the Custom Pattern button. Doing this brings up the Custom Pattern window.

Figure 4-17 Custom Pattern Editor

October 2013 74 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 75: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

This window allows you to create a new bitmap. The sizes of the bitmap can be 8x8, 16x16, 24x24, 32x32, 48x48, and 64x64. Clicking on the boxes in the definition window turn the boxes on (these will be shown in the color cell) clicking on a box that is on will toggle it off. The Reset button clears the definition window. The Add button will prompt you for a custom pattern name. This file will be saved in you ~/.cds_quickview/custom_bitmaps directory and will be available in future sessions of QuickView.

If you define a custom pattern, it becomes the current pattern for the new color cell.

Line Tab

Figure 4-18 Line Tab

By default, color cells generally draw lines (border lines) which are continuous and one pixel in width. If desired, you can specify a line width and/or a line dash interval for any color cell by clicking on the Line tab in the Color Palette.

To choose a new line choose one from the list. You can specify the line width by changing the line width value. You can change the color by clicking on the color button and choosing a new color from the color selector.

October 2013 75 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 76: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

Figure 4-19 Color Wheel

Choosing a new line should modify the new color cell on the bottom right of the window. Clicking Apply will update the color cell for the selected line(s) in the Data Palette.

Making Color Cells Solid

After a fill pattern has been assigned to a color cell, you can make it a solid fill pattern again, by clicking on the first pattern button found at the bottom of the Data Palette

Figure 4-20 Data Palette Color Controls

If multiple lines are selected, clicking the solid pattern, or any pattern in the list, will cause that the pattern for each line get modified but the color will remain the same.

October 2013 76 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 77: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

Fade Overlap

The Fade Overlap slider in the Data Palette dialog for viewing overlapping or non-overlapping data.

Note: For Fade Overlaps to work properly, all color cells should have a solid pattern. Also, the speed at which the Fade Overlaps work is determined by the speed of the hardware that is used.

Figure 4-21 Fade Sliders on the Data Palette

To access this functionality, use the following steps:

1. Load the databases you want to compare the visual differences.

2. Turn on the visibility for the layers in question and fill them with a solid color.

3. To fade the overlap regions, click on the toggle next to “Fade Overlap”.

4. Move the slider to the right to fade the overlap color.

October 2013 77 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 78: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualData Palette

Figure 4-22 Overlaps Faded

Limitations of Fading:

■ When using the fading functionality, the drawing speed is affected. In order to get the best accuracy at high scale factors, some of the speed up functionality is turned off. To adjust when this happens, the user can do the following:

1. Open the “Systems Parameters” dialog from the Parameters menu in the main drawing window.

2. Adjust the Zoom level for Blitting with the fading slider. This will only affect GDS and OASIS formats.

■ At lower zoom levels, the drawing accuracy for GDS and OASIS can be 1 pixel off causing a visual effect we call “Slivers”. This only occurs when comparing different formats like MEBES with GDS. Since they use different methods for drawing the data, at low zoom levels, you can have round off differences between formats which can lead to a 1 pixel display variance. You can further reduce this by doing the following:

1. Open the “GDS Parameters” or “OASIS Parameters” dialog from the Parameters menu.

2. Click on the “Cache & Culling” button.

3. Adjust the “Culling level for the Main Window” to either “None” or 1.

4. Redraw the window.

October 2013 78 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 79: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

5Multiple Drawing Windows & Data Palettes

Multiple Data Palettes

QuickView has four individual different Data Palettes. Each Data Palette shares the same user interface and the current Data Palette is identified by the Data Palette ID (DP ID) which is displayed in the Data Palette’s title bar.

Figure 5-1 Data Palette Id

October 2013 79 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 80: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualMultiple Drawing Windows & Data Palettes

Supported Attributes

Each data palette Id is able to maintain different display attributes allowing different drawing windows to display different content for the same database. The following table lists the attributes that can be different for different Data Palette IDs.

Selecting The Data Palette Id

The Data Palette Id can be changed by right clicking on the Data Palette’s title bar and selecting the DP ID that you want to work with.

Figure 5-2 Data Palette Id Selector

Table 5-1 Supported DP ID Attributes

Supported Attribute

Layer Visibility (Yes/No)

Layer Drawn State (Outline/Fill)

Layer Show/Hide State

Database Visible (Yes/No)

Database Show/Hide State

October 2013 80 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 81: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualMultiple Drawing Windows & Data Palettes

Drawing Window Pointer Focus

Additionally the Data Palette Id is set or updated automatically to match the Data Palette Id assigned to each drawing window when the drawing windows assumes pointer focus. The DP ID that is assigned to each drawing window is indicated by the number displayed on the drawing window’s options icon.

Figure 5-3 Drawing Window Options Icon - Data Palette Id

Clicking on the options icon displays the drawing window options. The first option in the list is the Data Palette Id for the associated drawing window.

Figure 5-4 Drawing Window Options Icon - Setting The Data Palette Id

October 2013 81 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 82: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualMultiple Drawing Windows & Data Palettes

Data Palette Ids With Multiple Drawing Windows

As indicated above DP IDs can be applied to different drawing windows to simultaneously show different content for the same loaded database(s). This is illustrated in Figure 5-5 where the main drawing window is using DP ID 1 and the second drawing window is using DPID2.

Figure 5-5 Multiple Drawing Windows Using Different DP IDs

Hiding Databases For Different Data Palette Ids

When working with multiple drawing windows as well as multiple Data Palettes it is convenient to hide one or more databases when displaying different DP IDs. The control for this is access by right clicking on one of the database icons in the active databases toolbar. This will display a panel that will let you specify which DP IDs the associated database will be displayed in.

October 2013 82 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 83: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualMultiple Drawing Windows & Data Palettes

Figure 5-6 Hiding A Database For Selected DP IDs

October 2013 83 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 84: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualMultiple Drawing Windows & Data Palettes

Drawing Window Synchronization

QuickView allows you to synchronize several different actions between the drawing windows. The following table lists the available synchronization actions.

Drawing Window Synchronization Options

The different drawing window are synchronized using the different drawing window options menus. Each drawing window has options to synchronize with the other drawing windows by selecting both the window to synchronize with along with the action(s) to synchronize.

Table 5-2

Action Description

Horizontal Synchronizes the center of the drawing windows so that they align to the same horizontal X coordinate.

Vertical Synchronizes the center of the drawing windows so that they align to the same vertical Y coordinate.

Scale Synchronizes the zoom factor so that the scale of the figures in each drawing window are the same.

October 2013 84 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 85: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualMultiple Drawing Windows & Data Palettes

Figure 5-7 Drawing Window Synchronization Options

October 2013 85 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 86: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualMultiple Drawing Windows & Data Palettes

October 2013 86 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 87: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

6Technology Definitions

QuickView Technology Definitions provide a facility for defining, storing and applying the following technology layer information:

■ Names Numbers & Data Types

■ Fill Color and Patterns

■ Line Color and Patterns

■ Visibility (On/Off)

■ Draw Mode (Fill/Outline)

■ Text Visibility (On/Off)

This chapter reviews the tools available in QuickView for interactively creating, saving, and applying QuickView Technology Definitions.

October 2013 87 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 88: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualTechnology Definitions

Introduction

QuickView technology information is stored online in a Technology Definition that is used to map individual technology layer information to the physical layers in a loaded geometrical data base. The attributes for a given technology layer are mapped to one or more physical database layers by a set of matching criteria in the Technology definition. When a technology is applied to a geometrical database in the data palette each physical layer in the database is compared against the matching criteria for each layer in the technology definition. When a match is found the physical geometrical database layer’s drawing and display attributes are updated to match those stored in the matching technology definition. This allows a QuickView Technology Definition to apply to, not only multiple databases from the same technology, but also multiple geometrical database formats generated for the same technology.

As describe above a technology definition consists of a collection of technology layer maps. Each layer map in a give technology definition has two parts.

■ Matching Criteria

The matching criteria is used by QuickView to identify the physical layers in a geometrical database that the corresponding drawing and display attributes will be applied to. The matching criteria is either a layer name, or a layer number and/or data type depending on the format of the geometrical database.

■ Drawing and Display Attributes

The drawing and display attributes describe how the data on a matching layer in the geometrical database will to be drawn in the drawing window as well as the layer name that will be displayed in the data palette.

October 2013 88 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 89: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualTechnology Definitions

Creating A Technology Definition

Technology definitions may be created in one of the following ways:

1. Saving the current drawing and display attributes from the data palette for a loaded geometrical database.

2. Importing a Virtuoso Technology File, Display Resource File and/or Stream Layer Mapping File.

3. Importing a PVS rule file containing layer map and layer definition commands.

4. Manually using a series of QUEL commands.

Saving A Technology Definition From The Data Palette

QuickView makes it easy to create, save and reuse technology definitions through the Data Palette. Creating a new technology definition with the data palette begins by setting the current display and drawing attributes of the loaded geometrical database layers to reflect the desired collection of drawing and display attributes that the new technology definition will represent. For more information about setting the drawing and display attributes in the data palette see Setting Draw Attributes.

After the drawing and display attributes are set to the desired values, the new technology definition is created by selecting the Technology File - Save As option from the geometrical database’s options menu in the database Data Palette header. Choosing this option will prompt the user for the name of the technology definition that will be created. Enter the name of the new technology definition and click OK.

After the technology is saved the new technology definition will be automatically saved in the user’s QuickView parameters and it will also be automatically loaded and available in future QuickView sessions.

October 2013 89 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 90: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualTechnology Definitions

Figure 6-1 Data Palette - Technology Definition - Save As

October 2013 90 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 91: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualTechnology Definitions

Importing Virtuoso Technology Information

A new technology definition may also be created using the Import Virtuoso Technology tool. This tool is displayed by selecting the Technology Manager option from the Tools menu at the top of the drawing window or by selecting the Technology - Tech Manager option from one of the geometrical database options menus located in the database’s Data Palette header. Selecting this options will display the Applying A Technology Definition. The Import Technology window is accessed by selecting “Import” from the Technology Manager’s File menu.

Figure 6-2 Import Technology Definition (Virtuoso Tech File)

Technology Name

The Technology Name value is uses as the name of the new QuickView Technology Definition that will be created when the Virtuoso technology information is translated and imported into QuickView.

Technology File

The Technology File value must be the path to the ASCII Virtuoso technology file (.tf).

Display Resource File

The Display Resource File value must be the path to the Virtuoso display resource file (.drf).

October 2013 91 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 92: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualTechnology Definitions

Layer Map File

The Layer Map File value is optional. This value, if provided, must be the path to the Virtuoso layer mapping or stream mapping file.

Import

When the user clicks the Import button QuickView will import the information from the identified Virtuoso technology files and translate the information into a new QuickView Technology Definition. Similar to the Data Palette Technology Save As option the imported technology definition will be automatically saved in the users QuickView parameters and it will also be automatically loaded and available in future QuickView sessions. Additionally the imported technology will be displayed in the Applying A Technology Definition for review and/or modification.

October 2013 92 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 93: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualTechnology Definitions

Importing PVS Rule File Information

A new technology definition may also be created using the Import PVS Rule File tool.This tool is displayed by selecting the Technology Manager option from the Tools menu at the top of the drawing window or by selecting Technology - Tech Manager option from one of the geometrical database options menus located in the database’s Data Palette header. Selecting one of these options will display the Applying A Technology Definition. The Import Technology window is accessed by selecting “Import” from the Technology Manager’s File menu.

Figure 6-3 Import Technology Definition (PVS Rule File)

Technology Name

The Technology Name value is uses as the name of the new QuickView Technology Definition that will be created when the Virtuoso technology information is translated and imported into QuickView.

PVS Rule File

The PVS Rule File value must be the path to the ASCII PVS Rule File.

October 2013 93 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 94: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualTechnology Definitions

Import

When the user clicks the Import button QuickView will import the information from the listed PVS Rule File and translate the internal layer definition/map information into a new QuickView Technology Definition. Similar to the Data Palette Technology Save As option the imported definition will be automatically saved in the user’s QuickView parameters and it will also be automatically loaded and available in future QuickView sessions. Additionally the imported technology will be displayed in the Applying A Technology Definition for review and/or modification.

October 2013 94 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 95: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualTechnology Definitions

Applying A Technology Definition

QuickView Technology Definitions are applied to a loaded geometrical database by selecting them from the associated database’s options menu in the Data Palette.

Figure 6-4 Data Palette - Technology Definition - Apply (CMOSXX)

October 2013 95 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 96: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualTechnology Definitions

Match By Name/Number

When a technology definition is applied to a particular geometrical database each layer in the database is compared against the mappings in the selected technology definition. When a match is found the display attributes of that layer in the Data Palette are updated to the values specified in the matching technology layer mapping. Depending on the format the database layers are either matched based on the geometrical database layer name or number/data type. In some cases the user may wish to specify if the technology definition will be applied by name or number. This “match by” parameter is set using the “Match By” options in the data base option menu prior to applying a particular technology definition.

Important

Currently the only database format that defaults to matching by number/data type is GDSII. All other formats default to matching by Layer Name.

The Default Technology

The user is able to reset the display values of a database in the data pallet to the default display setting by applying the Default Technology Definition. The default technology definition is applied by selecting the Technology File - Defaults option from the geometrical database’s options menu in the database’s Data Palette header. Selecting this option will apply the default technology definition which will reset the Display Name, Fill/Line Color, Fill/Line Pattern, Draw Mode, Visibility, & Text Visibility values to the default values for the associated database format.

Auto Layer Reset

Every time a user applies a technology definition to a database in the Data Palette QuickView will begin, in the default case, by resetting the display setting for the layers in the database to the default values. This operation ensures that residual display settings from the application of a previous technology definition are not inadvertently mixed with the display setting of the current technology definition.

Default Technology Options

The default technology settings in the Drawing - System Parameters allow the user to control what the default technology does when it is applied.

October 2013 96 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 97: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualTechnology Definitions

Figure 6-5 Data Palette - Technology Definition - Apply (CMOSXX)

Table 6-1 Default Technology Parameters (Drawing - System Parameters)

Option Description

Auto Apply When this option is pressed/checked the default technology will be automatically applied before each application of a new technology definition.

Visibility This option allows the user to specify if the default technology definition will make all of the layers in the database visible or not visible when it is applied.

Draw Mode This option allows the user to specify if the default technology definition will make all of the layers in the database draw in Fill or outline mode when it is applied.

Text This option allows the user to specify if the default technology definition will make all text visibility of the layers in the database Yes or No.

October 2013 97 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 98: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualTechnology Definitions

Specifying A Default Load Technology

A default load technology is different from the previously described default technology. A default load technology is a user defined technology definition that is applied automatically to each database just after it is loaded into QuickView.

A default load technology definition may be specified at the command line when QuickView is started. The default technology is specified using the -tech <techDefintionName> option. If this option is specified every database that is loaded into QuickView will automatically have the specified technology definition applied to it after it is loaded.

October 2013 98 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 99: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualTechnology Definitions

Technology Manager

The Technology Manager servers as a cockpit for working with QuickView technology definitions and it may be used for the following tasks.

■ Interactively reviewing or editing an existing technology definition.

■ Importing external technology information (Virtuoso/PVS).

■ Creating new technology definitions.

Figure 6-6 Technology Manager

Current Technology

The Current Technology option indicates which loaded technology definition is being displayed in the Technology Manager.

Editing

The Technology Manager allows the user to interactively manipulate a loaded technology definition. A particular technology map is edited by clicking on a value in the table and then,

October 2013 99 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 100: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualTechnology Definitions

after a brief pause, clicking again. This action will make the value for the Layer Name, Num, DT, & Display Name columns editable. If a value cannot be made editable (Color, & Text) then its value is modified using the associated option(s) in the tables right click context menu (“Select Color”, “Fill/Out”, “Visible”, & “Show Text”).

Figure 6-7 Technology Manager Edit Context Menu

The following table describes each column in the current Technology Manager mapping table.

Table 6-2 Technology Manager Mapping Table Column Descriptions

Column Description

Layer Name This is the name of the layer that will be searched for when attempting to identify matching layers in any geometrical databases that the technology definition is applied to.

Num This is the layer number of the layer that will be searched for when attempting to identify matching layers in any geometrical databases that the technology definition is applied to.

DT This is the data type of the layer that will be searched for when attempting to identify matching layers in any geometrical databases that the technology definition is applied to.

October 2013 100 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 101: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualTechnology Definitions

Editing Multiple Selected Mappings

When interacting with the Technology Manager mappings table a user is only able to update the values of one mapping at a time. In some instances it may be convenient to simultaneously update the values of multiple mappings to a common value. For example a user may wish to simultaneously set the drawing mode of several layers to ‘Outline’. Applying a value like this to multiple selected mappings is done using the Selection Editor.

In order to use the Selection Editor for this task the user must select all of the mappings that they wish to update and then displaying the Selection Editor using the corresponding option under the ‘Edit’ or table’s right click context menu.

Tip

Multiple selections are made using combinations of shift and control click interactions.

Display Name This is the layer name that will be displayed in the Data Palette when a matching layer is identified in any geometrical databases that the technology is applied to.

Color This is the color, line, pattern, drawing mode, & visibility state that will be applied when a matching layer is identified in any geometrical databases that the technology is applied to.

Text This is the text visibility state that will be applied when a matching layer is identified in any geometrical databases that the technology is applied to.

Table 6-2 Technology Manager Mapping Table Column Descriptions

Column Description

October 2013 101 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 102: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualTechnology Definitions

Figure 6-8 Technology Manager Selection Editor

The Selection Editor is automatically set with the values from the first selected item in the Technology Manager mapping table when it is displayed. The user may modify any of the column values and specify which ones will be updated by setting the check boxes on the left so that they are pressed/checked.

Clicking the OK or Apply button will update the marked/checked column values for each selected mapping in the Technology Manager mapping table.

Defining Connectivity

The Connectivity tab in the selection editor provides access to modify mapping Connectivity, Type and Resistance attributes. These values are used in conjunction with the Connectivity tool for highlighting nets and working with nets in designs using the associated technology. The connectivity in the technology mappings are defined using the mapping Display Names

October 2013 102 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 103: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualTechnology Definitions

where the current mapping layer is defined to connect with other mapping layers that have the specified Display Name values. The Selection is used to add and remove Display Names from the current technology definition to the selected mappings.

Figure 6-9 Technology Manager Selection Editor - Connectivity

Add Delete And Copy Mappings

Using the appropriate options in either the Edit menu, mapping table context menu, or toolbar the user may Add a new layer mapping or Copy/Delete one or more selected layer mappings.

October 2013 103 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 104: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualTechnology Definitions

Viewing The Layer Mapping Source Code

When manually editing or updating a technology definition using the associated QUEL commands the Technology Manager provides a useful tool for identifying and reviewing the required QUEL commands needed to generate one or more selected layer mapping(s).

When one or more layer mapping(s) is selected in the Technology Manager mapping table the QUEL source code may be viewed by selecting the “Show Source” option under the View menu.

Figure 6-10 Technology Manager Source Viewer

October 2013 104 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 105: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualTechnology Definitions

The Source Viewer shows the QUEL code required to reproduce the selected mappings in a Technology Definition file (.qvtf). For more information on Technology Definition files see Managing Saved Technology Definitions on page 106.

October 2013 105 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 106: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualTechnology Definitions

Managing Saved Technology Definitions

In general QuickView will automatically manage the technology definitions and the associated QuickView technology files (.qvtf).

When a user generates a new technology definition either by saving it from the data palette or importing it from Virtuoso etc. an associated ‘.qvtf’ file is created in the users $home/.cds_quickview/technology_files directory. This directory is automatically searched by QuickView at start up for files with a ‘.qvtf’ extension and loads them automatically.

The .qvtf files consist of a series of QUEL commands defining one or more technology definition(s). These files may be created, edited or deleted manually.

Global Technology Definitions

In some instances it may be desirable to provide a set of shared or global technology definitions. This is accomplished by setting the K2_TECHNOLOGY environment variable to a colon ‘:’ delimited list of directory paths. Each specified directory will be searched for QuickView technology files (.qvtf) in the order that they are specified at startup. Any identified technology files will be automatically loaded and available.

If the $home/.cds_quickview/technology_files directory is not included in the K2_TECHNOLOGY list it will be automatically added at the end of the list.

Its Just A Macro

A QuickView technology definition file (.qvtf) is just QUEL macro. Reviewing the contents of one of these files a user would see that it simply consists of a collection of QUEL commands that together define one or more QuickView technology definitions. This fact leads to a couple of interesting considerations.

First it means that users can manually generate technology definition files in a text editor. The Technology Manager may aid in this process by Viewing The Layer Mapping Source Code for a selected layer map in the layer mapping table. The source viewer can serve as a short cut to identifying the QUEL commands and argument values required to generate a complete technology definition file.

Second it means that if a technology definition file is not in the automatic load path defined by the K2_TECHNOLOGY environment variable it may be loaded at a later time using either the QUEL read(); command or by browsing to it through the Read Macro dialog’s file browser. This implies that the list of available technology definitions can be more tightly controlled using custom macro applications or usage models.

October 2013 106 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 107: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

7Drawing and Examining Data

This chapter discusses all aspects of data drawing and examination. The material in this chapter becomes relevant after you select data for viewing and set draw attributes as explained in Chapter 3, “Opening and Preparing Data,”.

Window Appearance

Apart from the data drawn in them, QuickView drawing windows have four appearance elements: background color, markup color, cursor and grid. You can modify these elements at any time.

Colors

The drawing window background color serves as background in all drawing windows and as background for Data Palette color samples. The Background Color can be set using the View - Background pulldown. The Background setting can be saved for future sessions in the System Parameters - Drawing page.

Cursors

Cursor parameters on the System Parameters menu control the appearance and behavior of the drawing window cursors and the cursor readout.

■ Crosshairs: To select drawing window cursors with or without extended crosshairs in the main, context, 2nd and 3rd drawing windows, see the Main Window and Context window tabs under System Parameters in Appendix C, “Parameter Reference.”

■ Precision and Resolution: To set the Digits of Precision and Units of Measurement, see the Cursor & Grid tab under System Parameters in Appendix C, “Parameter Reference.”

■ Cursor Snap: to set the snap interval for the extended crosshair cursor and for the cursor readout see the Cursor & Grid tab under System Parameters in Appendix C, “Parameter Reference.”

October 2013 107 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 108: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

You can open the System Parameters menu from the Main Drawing window through the Parameters pull-down.

Grids

Grid parameters on the Systems Parameters menu define drawing window grids.

■ Finest Grid, Second Grid, Third Grid and Coarsest Grid: To define up to four grid intervals for each drawing window see the Cursor & Grid tab under System Parameters in Appendix C, “Parameter Reference.” Values are in microns. Grids with a 0.0 value are disabled.

■ Grid Display: To enable or disable grid markings on the main, context, 2nd and 3rd drawing windows, see the Main Window and Context Window tabs under System Parameters in Appendix C, “Parameter Reference.”

If enabled, grids are marked when data is drawn. Only grid intervals which are relevant at the current drawing scale are marked.

You can open the System Parameters menu from the Main Drawing window through the Parameters pull-down.

Draw Commands

QuickView provides a full complement of draw commands.

Draw commands display patterns, job decks and layout database files listed in the Data Palette draw list if they are “visible” and if the associated toggles at the bottom of the Main Drawing window are “on.”

Draw commands are invoked in various ways. Some are invoked from a toolbar. Others are invoked by selecting a point or dragging a rectangle in a drawing window. A few are invoked from specialized menus.

Fit Window

Fit Window is ordinarily the first draw command. It displays all currently drawable data in the Main Drawing window or Context window. It scales the data to fill about 90% of the window.

■ Fit Window on the View Toolbar fits data to the Main Drawing window. You may also use the hot key f.

■ Fit Context the hot key <shift> F fits data to the Context window.

October 2013 108 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 109: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

If the Draw the Top Cell when it is Opened option is in effect, Fit Window and Fit Context are automatically invoked when you open a layout database cell. See Culling in Chapter 8, “Viewing Layout Database Data.”

Interrupt

The Interrupt command halts drawing activity or other commands which have duration.

■ Interrupt on the View Toolbar issues an interrupt command.

Redraw

Redraw commands redraw current or previous drawing window displays according to the current Data Palette draw list.

Redraw Window redraws the current display. It is useful for applying new draw attributes and for removing stale rulers or stale query and measure marks.

■ Redraw Window on the View Toolbar redraws the Main Drawing window. You may also use the hot key r.

■ Redraw Context the hot key <shift> R redraws the Context window.

■ Last Window and Next Window redraw the Main Drawing window from an automatic list of up to twenty recent Main Drawing window displays.

■ Last Window on the View Toolbar redraws the Main Drawing window from the previous item in the list of recent displays.

Zoom

Zoom commands magnify or reduce currently displayed data. Zoom In draws a closer view which shows greater detail but narrows the field of view. Zoom Out draws a more distant view which extends the field of view but shows less detail.

Zoom commands which you invoke by dragging a rectangle in a drawing window are the most flexible and most frequently used.

■ Zoom In draws a closer view of a subset of a current display. The data can be selected and drawn in any window.

Drag a rectangle from left to right (or top to bottom--see Pan and Zoom below) with ML or <shift> ML to select the data to draw and the target window.

October 2013 109 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 110: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

The rectangle identifies the data.

The use of ML or <shift> ML identifies the target window. ML draws to the Main Drawing window. <shift> ML draws to the Context window.

■ Zoom Out draws a more distant view of a superset of an existing display. The data can be selected in any window. It is drawn in the same window.

Drag a rectangle from right to left (or from bottom to top--see Pan and Zoom below) in the Main Drawing window with ML or in the Context window with <shift> ML to indicate how much the current display should be reduced.

Note: if you drag a rectangle right to left (or bottom to top--see Pan and Zoom below) in the Main Drawing window with <shift> ML or in the Context window with ML, you invoke the Zoom In command rather than the intended Zoom Out command. Zooming in or out can also be done by using the scroll wheel. Scrolling up will zoom in 50% around the current mouse position and scrolling down will zoom out 50% around the current mouse position.

■ Pan and Zoom on the System Parameters menu specifies horizontal or vertical drag boxes for the Zoom In and Zoom Out commands.

❑ Horiz specifies left to right for Zoom In and right to left for Zoom Out.

❑ Vert specifies top to bottom for Zoom In and bottom to top for Zoom Out.

You can open the System Parameters menu from the Main Drawing window through the Parameters pull-down.

Other zoom commands are invoked from the View Toolbar. They draw a subset or superset of the data in the same window, magnified or reduced according to the value of the Zoom Percent parameter.

■ Zoom In zooms the Main Drawing window in.

■ Zoom Out zooms the Main Drawing window out.

■ Percent of the Window for Zoom Keys: on the, Pan & Zoom tab of the System Parameters menu specifies the relative effect of these commands.

The default value, 50 percent, causes Zoom In to double the drawing scale and Zoom Out to halve it. Smaller values increase the effect. Larger values decrease it.

You can open the System Parameters menu from the Main Drawing window through the Parameters pull-down.

October 2013 110 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 111: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Pan

Pan commands shift the field of view for currently displayed data. The four arrow keys also move the data by 85% of the window: up, left, right, and down.

One pan command is invoked by selecting a point in a drawing window.

■ Pan generates a display whose center is a selected point in an existing display. The data can be selected and drawn in any window.

Select a point in either drawing window with ML or <Shift> ML to identify the desired center point and the target window. The mouse must not move while you select the point.

The point identifies the center of the new display.

The use of ML or <shift> ML identifies the target window. ML draws to the Main Drawing window. <shift> ML draws to the Context window.

A variant of this command which has twice the pan effect can be accessed through the default hot key x.

■ Percent of the Window for Pan Keys: in the Pan & Zoom tab, of the System Parameters menu specifies the relative effect of these commands.

The default value, 50 percent, shifts the field of view by one half the size of the affected window. Smaller values reduce the effect. Larger values increase it.

You can open the System Parameters menu from the Main Drawing window through the Parameters pull-down.

October 2013 111 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 112: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Pan/Zoom Tool (Pan To Point)

Figure 7-1 Pan/Zoom Tool

The Pan/Zoom Too will pan and zoom to the specified point, rectangle, or polygon while marking it on the screen.

Coordinates (Coords)

The coordinates text field will simply attempt to extract numerical values from the text that is entered. Depending on the number of numerical values identified it will automatically pan and zoom the specified drawing window.

Mode

The Pan/Zoom Mode determines action taken when in specified drawing window.

Table 7-1 Interpreting The Entered Text

Number Values Result

Two Pan & Zoom to the specified point. (x, y)

Four Pan & Zoom to the specified rectangle or window. (x1, y1), (x2, y2)

Six or More Pan & Zoom to the specified polygon. (x1, y1), (x2, y2), ... (xn, yn)

October 2013 112 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 113: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Window

The window option specifies the drawing window that will be Panned & Zoomed for the current coordinates value.

Query and Measure

Query and measure commands allow you to select points, edges, corners and figures in the Main Drawing window and to obtain descriptions and measurements from them.

Table 7-2 Pan/Zoom Modes

Mode Description

Auto This mode will only Pan the specified drawing window.

Auto Fit This mode will only Pan the specified drawing window unless the size of the item being Panned too is larger than the current viewing area. When the item is larger than the current viewing area then the specified drawing window will be zoomed out so that the whole item can be displayed.

Zoom This will Pan & Zoom so that the entered item will be centered and fit in the specified drawing window.

# of microns This is similar to the Zoom Mode but the window will not be allowed to zoom into and area showing less than the specified number of microns.

Table 7-3 Pan/Zoom Windows

Mode Description

Current The drawing window that currently had pointer focus.

Main The Main Drawing Window

Second, Third, Fourth

The respective drawing windows.

Context The Context Drawing Window

October 2013 113 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 114: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

The commands are invoked from various Context menus. For instructions on selecting a Context menu, see under Context Menus” in Chapter 2, “The Main Drawing Window.”

Some commands have looping and non-looping forms.

■ You can globally set a loop by marking the loop toggle item on the Measure pull-down, the Utils Toolbar or under the Measure Context Menu in the Main Drawing window. You may also set this global command by marking the Commands Loop until Explicitly Quit option on the System Parameters menu under the Cmd Behavior tab. A command iterates until you cancel it with MR.

■ If you invoke a command with ML or MR and if the Commands Loop option is off, the command does not iterate.

You can open the System Parameters menu from the Main Drawing window through the Parameters pull-down.

Some commands prompt you to select corners, edges or figures in the Main Drawing window.

■ Items which are not “visible” cannot be selected. See Visible under Setting Draw Attributes in Chapter 4, “Data Palette.”

■ If two or more items are equally close to a point, the command may select either of them.

■ If you click near the edge of the display, the closest item may be outside the field of view.

■ Occasionally, if a GDSII file has arrayed cell references which severely overlap, it is necessary to select Support Heavily Overlapped AREF Cells on the GDSII Parameters menu under the Command Prefs tab, in order to obtain desired results.

You can open the GDSII Parameters menu from the Main Drawing window through the Parameters pull-down.

Important

Some commands prompt you to make two selections. After making one selection, feel free to use pan, zoom and redraw commands before making the second selection.

Note: Some commands mark items by overwriting edges and by placing X’s at corners or other locations. Such marks remain until the command no longer iterates and/or you redraw the window. The marks are drawn in the drawing window markup color.

Command prompts appear in the UL of the Main Drawing Window. Results are usually reported on the upper status line of the Main Draw window. Some commands also send results to the Information and Errors window.

October 2013 114 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 115: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Quick Measure

In the default state the middle mouse button may be used to perform two different types of quick measurements depending on the middle mouse interaction in the drawing window.

Corner, Edge, or Intersection

A simple middle mouse click in a drawing window will automatically identify and measure the nearest corner, edge, or intersection based on the geographical distance from the pointer location.

Multi Edge

A middle mouse click and drag operation will automatically perform a multi edge measurement along the specified line.

Corners, Edges and Points

Corner and edge commands identify corners and edges and measure distances between them.

For layout database commands, an edge is an edge of a polygon or path. For Pattern & job deck commands, an edge is a trapezoid edge, a pattern limit line or substrate limit line. For both, a corner is a point where edges join.

Point commands use points that you select. They do not snap to nearby data. You can obtain useful information with point commands if you zoom in sufficiently close before you select points.

Corner, edge and point commands appear on the appropriate Context Menus & general Measure pull-down.

The measurements for the commands are also written into the Info and Errors window. More information is usually contained there, such as the exact coordinates of the edges selected. This facilitates saving information to a file.

■ One Edge queries an edge. It marks the edge and reports its location and length.

■ Two Edges calculates the separation between two edges and the mid point between their centers. It marks the edges and reports the smallest horizontal, vertical or diagonal separation.

■ One Corner queries a corner. It marks the corner and reports its location.

October 2013 115 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 116: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

■ Two Corners calculates the distance between two corners. It also identifies a point midway between two corners. It marks the corners and reports the horizontal, vertical or diagonal distance.

■ Find Center determines the center of a figure. It marks the center and reports its location.

■ Measurement (hot key m) measures between any two centers of polygons, centers of edges, corners or intersections. It marks the items and reports horizontal, vertical and diagonal distance. The hot keys that accompany this command make it very useful to position the cursor and use the keys.

Press Measurement and select two items when prompted by placing the cursor on or near the item and identifying it as an edge (hot key e), horizontal (hot key h), vertical (hot key v), corner (hot key c), intersection (hot key i) or center (hot key n).

■ Intersection identifies the point where two non-parallel edges join or intersect or where they would intersect if extended. It marks the intersection and reports the location.

■ Stacked Edges Sometimes a set of parallel edges will occupy the same location so that they are stacked on top of each other. The standard edge selection tools will only return one of the stacked edges and it can be difficult to identify all of the edges at that location. The Stacked Edges tool is only accessible using the Shift-E hot key. Locating your pointer near the stacked edges and pressing the Shift-E hot key will display the stacked edges stepper at the bottom of the Main Drawing Window.

October 2013 116 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 117: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Figure 7-2 Stacked Edges Stepper

The edge stepper will list the number of stacked edges and allow the user to step through them one at a time. The first icon on the stepper will generate a report on all of the stacked edges in the Information and Errors Window. The second icon has two states. When it is pressed QuickView will automatically zoom to fit the current edge in the drawing window as the user steps from edge to edge.

Status

Status commands identify and describe elements more complex than edges and corners.

Pattern and Job deck status commands appear on the <Format> Context menus in the Main Drawing window. For related commands, see Descriptions under Patterns and Job Decks later in this chapter.

■ <Format> / Figure Status queries a selected trapezoid, a pattern limit or substrate limit. The command marks the selected item and reports the pattern or job deck name and the figure type.

October 2013 117 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 118: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Additional information is reported in the Information and Errors window. Address unit coordinates, if given, are relative to the lower left corner of the pattern without rotation, mirroring, magnification or offset.

Layout database Status Commands appear on the Main Drawing window Context menus under the Status menu.

■ Geom(etry) Status queries a specified path or polygon. The command marks the selected item and reports the layer and figure type.

A full description is reported in the Information and Errors window.

■ Stacked Geometries Sometimes a set of geometries will occupy the same location so that they are stacked on top of each other. The standard geometry status selection tools will only return one of the stacked geometries and it can be difficult to identify all of the geometries at that location.

The Stacked Geometries tool is accessible in two ways.

❑ Using the Shift-G hot key or the Measure->Figure Status->Stacked (Edge) options.

Locating your pointer near the stacked coincident edges of the stacked geometries and pressing the Shift-G hot key will display the stacked geometries stepper at the bottom of the Main Drawing Window. The stacked geometries stepper will be loaded with a list of all of the geometries that have an edges overlapping the closets edge to the pointer or selected location.

❑ Using the Shift-P hot key or the Measure->Figure Status->Stacked (Under Point) options.

Locating your pointer in the drawing window pressing the Shift-P hot key will display the stacked geometries stepper at the bottom of the Main Drawing Window. The stacked geometries stepper will be loaded with a list of all of the geometries that are under the pointer or selected location.

Important

The figure status under a point operation will return results for each format that is loaded in QuickView but it will only return figures for the current database in each format. If you have two GDSII databases loaded for example it will only return figures for the current GDSII database.

October 2013 118 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 119: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Figure 7-3 Stacked Geometries Stepper

The stacked geometries stepper will list the number of stacked geometries and allow the user to step through them one at a time. The first icon on the stepper will generate a report on all of the stacked geometries in the Information and Errors Window. The second icon has two states. When it is pressed QuickView will automatically zoom to fit the current geometry in the drawing window as the user steps from geometry to geometry.

■ Inst(ance) Status queries an instance of a cell (select a reference when prompted). The command marks the extent of the cell and its center and reports the cell name and center location.

Cell hierarchy information, including cell names, cell locations, rotation and reflection, is reported to the Information and Errors window.

■ Stacked Instances Often a set of multiple instances will be covering the same location so that they are stacked on top of each other. The standard Instance status selection tools will only return one of the stacked instances and it can be difficult to identify all of the instances at that location. The Stacked Instances tool is only accessible using the Shift-B hot key. Locating your pointer at the desired location and pressing the Shift-B hot key will display the stacked instances stepper at the bottom of the Main Drawing Window.

October 2013 119 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 120: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Figure 7-4 Stacked Instances Stepper

The stacked instances stepper will list the number of stacked instances and allow the user to step through them one at a time. The first icon on the stepper will generate a report on all of the stacked instances in the Information and Errors Window. The second icon has two states. When it is pressed QuickView will automatically zoom to fit the current instance in the drawing window as the user steps from instance to instance.

Multi Edge Measure

The multi edge measure function allows you quickly measure the edge separations along a line you select in the drawing window. A multi edge measurement is initiated using the Multi-edge Measure option under the Measure menu in the Main Drawing Window.

October 2013 120 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 121: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Figure 7-5 Multi Edge Measure Selecting Line

October 2013 121 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 122: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Figure 7-6 Multi Edge Measure Results

October 2013 122 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 123: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Sessions Manager

The Session Manager provides a set of tools related to working with, saving, and restoring various attributes of a QuickView session. These tools are accessed though the Sessions Manager option found under the Tools menu in the Main Drawing window.

View History

The View History tool automatically tracks and maintains a list of the last 100 views in the Main Drawing window (Left, Bottom, Right, Top). This history provides a mechanism for returning to a particular view within the same session without requiring you to manually pan and zoom to the same location. These views are accessed and applied using the forward and back buttons or by clicking on a view in the list. Additionally the forward and back buttons in the Main Drawing Window’s View Toolbar are directly linked to the forward and back buttons in the view history tool for convenient access.

Figure 7-7 Sessions Manager - View History

Tip

The complete view history is easily reviewed by clicking and dragging over the view history list.

October 2013 123 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 124: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Bookmarks

The Bookmarks tool allows you to name and save the current view for convenient access in the future. A saved bookmark provides a mechanism for returning to a particular view within the same session or a different session without requiring you to manually pan and zoom to the same location. Bookmarks are applied by either selecting the bookmark in the list and clicking the Apply Bookmark icon in the bookmarks toolbar or by simply double clicking the bookmark in the list.

Attaching A Database

In addition to saving a set of viewing coordinates, you are able to attach a database path to the bookmark. When a database is attached to a bookmark, QuickView will automatically check to see if the database is currently loaded when the bookmark is applied. If the database is not loaded you will be prompted to optionally load the attached database before the bookmark is applied. This mechanism is especially handy when moving from session to session.

Figure 7-8 Sessions Manager - Bookmarks

October 2013 124 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 125: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Bookmarks Toolbar

The toolbar located at the top of the Bookmarks screen in the Sessions Manager includes the following tools or controls. You can identify the exact function of each icon by holding the mouse pointer stationary over a particular item. This will present a tool tip describing the action attached to the button.

Tip

Bookmarks can be exported to a file and shared with other QuickView users.

Tip

For convenience generic bookmarks can be created for the current view using the add bookmark icon in the Utilities toolbar located in the Main Drawing Window.

Table 7-4 Bookmarks Toolbar Options From Left To Right

Action Description

Add Bookmark Creates a new bookmark initialized with the current viewing coordinates.

Apply Bookmark Automatically pans and zooms to the bookmark viewing area and prompts to load attached database if necessary.

Previous Bookmark Automatically selects and applies the previous bookmark.

Next Bookmark Automatically selects and applies the next bookmark.

New Bookmark Creates a new blank bookmark.

Delete Bookmark Deletes the selected bookmark.

Delete All Bookmarks Deletes all of the bookmarks in the list.

Show Bookmark Properties Will show the bookmark properties panel below the bookmark list when it is hidden.

Import Bookmark File Imports a bookmark from a bookmark file created using the export bookmark option.

Export Bookmark To File Exports a bookmark to a file that can be shared with other QuickView Users.

October 2013 125 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 126: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Saved States

The Saved States tool allows you to name and save the current state of some or all of the currently loaded data. A saved state can be applied at any time, and even across QuickView sessions, to reload all of the state data with the same viewing attributes that were applied when the state was created.

Figure 7-9 Sessions Manager - Sates

Viewing Attributes

A saved state includes the following viewing attributes, where applicable, for each database that was captured in the state.

Table 7-5 Viewing Attributes Captured In A Saved State

Attribute Description

Viewing Cell The name of the cell being viewed in a hierarchical database.

Rotation The rotation value being applied by QuickView to the current viewing cell.

October 2013 126 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 127: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Sates Toolbar

The toolbar located at the top of the States screen in the Sessions Manager includes the following tools or controls. You can identify the exact function of each icon by holding the mouse pointer stationary over a particular item. This will present a tool tip describing the action attached to the button.

Minor The mirror value being applied by QuickView to the current viewing cell.

Magnification The magnification value being applied by QuickView to the current viewing cell.

X & Y Offset The X & Y offset values being applied by QuickView to the current viewing cell.

Layer Visibility The visibility state for each layer in the database. (Visible, Not Visible)

Drawing Mode The drawing mode for each layer in the database. (Fill, Outline, Reverse Tone, ...)

Color Cell Information The specific drawing characteristics. (Fill & Line Colors & Patterns)

Text Visibility The text element visibility state for each layer in the database.

Table 7-6 States Toolbar Options From Left To Right

Action Description

Add Current State Creates a new state for all of the data currently loaded into QuickView.

Select & Add State Allows you to create a new state for a subset of the databases currently loaded into QuickView.

Load And Apply State Automatically loads the databases in the selected state and applies the saved attributes.

Delete State Deletes the selected state.

Delete All States Deletes all of the states in the list.

Table 7-5 Viewing Attributes Captured In A Saved State

Attribute Description

October 2013 127 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 128: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

X State

The X State is an extension of the new QuickView state tool that is attached to, and activated by, the Shift-X and Shift-Z hotkeys. When the user applies the Shift-X hotkey to automatically close all loaded data, QuickView automatically captures the current state for all loaded data. This automatically captured state is known as the X State.

The X State is applied using the Shift-Z hotkey which will reload all of the data that was closed using the Shift-X hotkey with the same viewing attributes that were applied when the X State was created. This provides a convenient mechanism for refreshing data that was modified after it was loaded into QuickView.

X States can be applied across sessions. For example quickly capturing the state of the current session using the Shift-X hotkey, perhaps just before exiting, would allow you to initialize or apply the X State to a new or different session using the Shift-Z hotkey.

October 2013 128 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 129: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Multi Cell/Object Manager

The Multi Cell/Object Manager provides a set of tools and features for selecting and placing different groups of cells/objects from the loaded databases in the Main Drawing Window.

Figure 7-10 Multi Cell/Object Manager

The Multi Cell/Object Manager is divided into two distinct sections. On the left is the list of Groups available in the current QuickView session. On the right is the list of cells/objects in the current selected group along with the controls for modifying the individual placement attributes for each cell/object in the group.

Groups

The Default Group

By default when a database is opened with QuickView a Top Cell/Object is automatically chosen and displayed for that database. This is sometimes referred to as the current viewing cell/object and it can be changed using one of the cell/object selectors or the data browser. Regardless of which cell is chosen in this default state only a single cell from each database can be drawn at any given time. Additionally the offset, rotation, reflection and magnification are controlled by the attributes assigned in the database header in the Data Palette.

This default state is represented in the Multi Cell/Object Manager as the “Default” group. Selecting the Default group in the groups list will switch you back to the default state showing only the current viewing cells/objects for the loaded databases in the default sate. Any attempts to modify this default state by loading a new database or selecting a different cell/

October 2013 129 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 130: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

object using one of the cell/object selectors or the Data Browser will cause the Multi Cell/Object Manager to automatically switch to displaying the “Default” group.

User Defined Groups

New groups can be added to the group list by clicking on the “Add New Group” icon and providing a name for the new group. New groups, by default, will not contain any viewing cells/objects and the drawing window will not display any data when it is redrawn with the new group selected.

Each user defined group can have a different set of viewing cells/objects. Cells and objects are added, modified and managed using the controls under the Cells/Objects section of the Multi Cell/Object Manager.

Auto Redraw

When this option is checked the currently selected group will automatically be redrawn in the main drawing window each time it is modified or a new group is selected.

Saving Groups

User defined groups are automatically saved as they are modified by the user. These groups are saved in the users home environment and they are automatically loaded and available for subsequent QuickView sessions.

Each time a user selects a user defined group the Multi Cell/Object Manager will verify that the databases that the cells and objects referenced in group are loaded in QuickView. If the associated database(s) are not currently loaded the Multi Cell/Object Manager will load them automatically so that the group can be drawn completely.

Deleting Groups

The selected group can be deleted using the Delete icon above the Groups list. Deleting a group will also delete the saved group from the user’s home environment.

Copying Groups

The selected group can be copied to a new group with a different name using the Copy icon above the Groups list. The copied group will also be saved automatically to the user’s home environment.

October 2013 130 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 131: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Exporting Groups

The selected group can be exported to a file which can be shared between QuickView users and imported at a later time. The export icon is located below the of the Groups List.

Importing Groups

An exported group file can be imported into the current Groups list using the import icon located below the Groups list. Importing a group file will automatically add the group to the groups list.

Caution

If the imported group is already listed in the Groups list it will be overwritten with the definition found in the export file.

Cells/Objects

A multi cell group can contain zero or more cells or objects from the loaded databases. The list of cells/objects defines what will be draw in the drawing window for the currently selected group. For example if the cell/object list is empty the drawing window will be blank.

Adding Cells/Objects To A Group

A cell or object is added to the currently selected group by clicking on the Add Cell/Object icon. This will display the Cell/Object Selection Dialog. At the top of the cell/object selector is an option button indicating which loaded database the current list of available cells/objects is for. Selecting a different database will list the cells/objects for that database. Selecting a cell/object from the list and clicking the add button will add the selected cell/object to the current group.

October 2013 131 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 132: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Figure 7-11 Multi Cell/Object Manager - Cell/Object Selector

Important

Not all database formats are currently supported.

Tip

A cell/object from the same database can be added to a group multiple times allowing for multiple placements of the same cell/object.

Current Cell/Object Parameters

The Current Cell/Object Parameters apply to the currently selected cell/object in the Cells/Objects List. They are displayed by clicking on the Cell/Object Parameters icon above the Cell/Objects List. Clicking this icon again will hide the parameters.

October 2013 132 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 133: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Figure 7-12 Multi Cell/Object Manager - Cell/Object Parameters

All of the available cell/object parameters are applied on top of the same parameters assigned to the respective database headers in the Data Palette. That is if the SRAM database is offset by 100um in the x direction in its Data Palette header then any of the Cells/Objects added to the current group will automatically start with a offset of 100um in x. Entering a value in the x offset field of the cell/object parameters will simply add to this value.

The following table lists the available general cell/object parameters.

Array Current Cell/Object

The Array Current Cell/Object parameters are optional and they are only considered and applied when the associated check box is checked. These parameters allow the cell to be

Table 7-7 Cell/Object Parameters

Parameter Description

Offset X Offset the cell/object in the horizontal direction from its drawn origin.

Offset Y Offset the cell/object in the vertical direction from its drawn origin.

Magnification Scale the cell/object by the specified amount.

Mirror/Reflection Mirror or reflect the cell/object about its axis.

Rotation Rotate the cell.object about its origin.

October 2013 133 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 134: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

drawn in a specified number of rows and columns at a specified center to center stepping distance. The following table lists the available parameters for arraying a cell/object.

The Update Step Values icon, when available, will automatically fill in the Step X & Y values with the size of the associated cell.

Groups Instances

Similar to adding cells/objects to the current group other groups may also be instanced in the current group providing for a form of group hierarchy. Adding A group instance is done by clicking the add cell/object icon and choosing the Groups tab in the Cell/Object Selector Dialog.

Group instance placement work the same as cell an object placement however some of the placement options like rotation and mirroring are not supported for group instances.

Table 7-8 Array Current Cell/Object Parameters

Parameter Description

Cols (X) The number of columns.

Rows (Y) The number of rows.

Step (X) The center to center distance from one array placement to the next in the horizontal direction.

Step (Y) The center to center distance from one array placement to the next in the vertical direction.

October 2013 134 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 135: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Patterns and Job Decks

Descriptions

Description commands are found under the Info menu in the data header Context Menu in the Data Palette. They provide information about patterns and job decks. The information appears in the Information and Errors window.

■ Identify provides information from a pattern file header, including the name, creation date, address size, stripe height, dimensions, etc.

■ Analyze provides a pattern’s figure count. If the pattern has compacted figures, it provides a separate compacted figure count and percentage. The total trapezoid area and assumed chrome percentage are also provided.

■ Shoreline calculates a pattern’s total feature perimeter length and total number of feature inflection points. The perimeter length and inflection point count are based on “composite” figures, i.e. discounting trapezoid abutment lines (but not overlap). There is typically a significant delay in obtaining this information for large patterns.

■ Validate checks a pattern for syntax errors and invalid data. If errors are found, it describes them in detail.

Note: Pattern errors occur because a pattern was created improperly or because a file was corrupted during data transmission or at some other point.

Patterns with errors generally cannot be successfully written to a mask or reticle. In many cases they cannot be viewed. However, if errors are solely in the pattern segment index and/or total record count, Validate determines correct values so the pattern can be viewed.

■ Per cent Digitized provides the percent of digitized data in the pattern.

■ List Patterns lists all patterns referenced by a job deck. If the patterns are accessible, address size and nominal width and height are shown.

■ Describe Pattern identifies a pattern referenced by a job deck and provides placement information.

■ Identify Pattern gives you a list of patterns found in the job deck and provides information about the file system properties of the selected patterns.

■ Analyze Pattern runs the Analyze command for a specific pattern in a job deck.

■ If you select a job deck, you may also be asked to select a level or pattern.

October 2013 135 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 136: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

■ You can make selections from an intermediate menu as long as it is visible. If there is an All Patts or All Levels button, you can use it to select all patterns or levels listed in the menu.

■ Commands which have duration can be halted by pressing Interrupt on the View Toolbar.

Job Patterns and Instances

Job pattern and instance commands allow you to assign unique colors or other attributes to job deck patterns and pattern instances which are displayed in the Main Drawing window. This can be helpful as you examine job pattern distribution, abutment or overlap.

Before using these commands, select the relevant job deck(s) and level(s) and draw them in the Main Drawing window. If the data is extensive, you may wish to zoom in to a particular area.

Job pattern and instance commands appear on the MEBES Main Drawing Window Context menu.

Color Per Pattern and Color Per Instance assign a unique color attribute to each pattern or pattern instance in the Main Drawing window.

■ Press Color / Patt or Color / Inst. Then redraw the data.

While either command is in effect, a list of patterns or instances appears in the Data Palette draw list under the heading JOB DECK PATTERNS or JOB DECK INSTANCES. You may treat this list as you would a list created by Select Patterns or Select Instances if you wish. See next.

Note: Color Per Pattern and Color Per Instance supersede any previous Color Per Pattern, Color Per Instance, Select Patterns and Select Instances commands.

Select Patterns and Select Instances allow you to select patterns or pattern instances in the Main Drawing window so you can assign color, drawn and visible attributes to them individually.

1. Press Select Patts or Select Insts. When prompted, select a reasonable number of patterns or pattern instances in the Main Drawing window by dragging a rectangle over them with MM.

2. A list of patterns or instances touched by the rectangle is added to the Data Palette draw list under the heading JOB DECK PATTERNS or JOB DECK INSTANCES. If the relevant list already exists, new items are added to it. If the other list exists, it is not affected.

October 2013 136 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 137: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

3. Each pattern has the attributes of its parent job deck level. Each instance has the attributes of its parent pattern (if the parent pattern is listed in a JOB DECK PATTERNS list) or of its parent job deck level. However, the level attributes Out (Outline) and Fil (Fill) appear as Rev (Reverse Tone) if so specified in the job deck.

4. You may assign color, drawn and visible attributes to patterns and instances as desired.

5. If the relationship between items in the draw list and items in the drawing window is unclear, it may be helpful to draw the display with pattern names (see Text under Setting Draw Attributes in Chapter 4, “Data Palette.” ) or to use the Describe A Pattern command (see Descriptions under Patterns and Job Decks earlier in this chapter).

6. You can remove individual items from the draw list by highlighting the items and pressing Close Selected data header Context Menu in the Data Palette. As items are removed, pattern attributes revert to job deck level attributes and instance attributes revert to pattern attributes or to job deck level attributes.

Cancel Patterns And Instances cancels Color Per Pattern, Color Per Instance, Select Patterns and Select Instances.

■ Press Cancel P/I. Then redraw the drawing window(s).

Arbitrary Overlap and Double Fetch

As you view job decks parsed with a MEBES parse command, you may wish to consider how the E-beam might handle die overlap.

Die overlap occurs when a job deck ROWS command specifies a horizontal stepping distance which is less than the width of the pattern being stepped.

The E-beam uses special writing methods when it encounters die overlap to avoid shaking of the stage which could result from “back stepping” the overlap.

QuickView provides three methods for drawing die overlap which reflect strategies used by the E-beam:

■ Arbitrary Overlap draws each overlapping pattern instance from the pattern’s left (before mirroring) to and including the point of overlap. The remainder of the pattern is discarded. The stepping distance is not adjusted.

■ Double Fetch draws all pattern data. The stepping distance given in the job deck is adjusted, if necessary, to represent an integral number of writing addresses. If Phased Feature Pixelization is specified in the job deck, the logic takes the pfp grid factor into account.

■ Draw As Is draws all pattern data in full with no adjustment to the stepping distance.

October 2013 137 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 138: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Overlap Default For MEBES at the bottom of the MEBES General Parameters menu interacts with overlap specification in a job deck. (The MEBES General Parameters menu can be opened from the Parameters-> MEBES pull-down of the Main Drawing window.)

■ If Overlap Default For MEBES is set to Draw As Is, QuickView uses Draw As Is.

■ If Overlap Default For MEBES is set to Arbitrary Overlap or Double Fetch, QuickView uses that method or the opposite method if specified in the job deck.

Note: If Double Fetch is used and the job deck specifies Phased Feature Pixelization but does not specify a pfp grid factor, the Default PFP Grid Factor on the Job Parse Options menu is used. That menu can be opened from the M Tools pull-down of the Main Drawing window.

Arbitrary Overlap and Double Fetch, as explained here, approximate the E-beam writing options. In practice, there are certain other situations where parts of a pattern may be double exposed or omitted depending on factors such as the width of pattern memory in an individual E-beam or the occurrence of empty stripes in the overlapped pattern.

Spot Mode and Virtual Addressing

MEBES data is commonly thought of as rectangles, parallelograms and trapezoids. For certain exacting applications, however, it may be necessary to examine the E-beam exposure pattern. For independent patterns and for job decks parsed with a MEBES parse command, QuickView provides a viewing mode, Spot Mode, which shows theoretical E-beam exposure patterns.

Spot Mode describes how E-beam pattern memory is filled by drawing each individual spot as a small circle. Trapezoid edges are also shown.

E-beam Spot Mode parameters on the MEBES General Parameters menu allow you to enable or disable Spot Mode and to specify a minimum spot interval.

■ E-beam Spot Mode enables or disables Spot Mode drawing.

■ Smallest Interval To Draw (pixels) sets the threshold for Spot Mode drawing. Spot Mode is not used if the spot diameter would be less than the specified number of drawing window pixels. The default of 6 pixels is generally a satisfactory value.

You can open the MEBES General Parameters menu from the Parameters -> MEBES pull-down of the Main Drawing window.

If a job deck specifies virtual addressing for a pattern or if you specify virtual addressing for an independent pattern, Spot Mode uses virtual addressing pattern filling rules. Otherwise it uses single-phase printing rules.

October 2013 138 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 139: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Actual writing on a mask or reticle is, of course, affected by the mechanics and physics of the writing process, by writing options specified in a job deck, by E-beam run-time parameters and by the E-beam hardware and software configuration.

Layout Database Data

This topic describes commands which pertain to GDSII data and some of the other layout database data.

Selective Display Forms and Steppers

There are five selective display forms to customize the appearance of data of interest. They are similar in that they consist of a region selection area at the top of the form, a list of selectable entries in the middle and a mechanism for selection of visual parameters at the bottom. Four of them are nearly identical: the Layer Display, the Text Display, the Instance Properties and the Geometry Properties forms. The fifth, Cell Display, is somewhat longer because it has more visual parameters which can be set.

Steppers allow you to step through data to locate and examine elements or features which meet selected criteria. From the bottom of each Selective Display Form is the button “Stepper” which provides a mechanism to step through each location of interest within the selected data window. An execution menu, which appears when the stepper is invoked, displays specifics of the data which meet the search criteria.

Note: An internal limit of 1000 entries is enforced. To raise this limit you may choose a different number from the Maximum Steps in Stepper options on the Cmd Behavior tab, of the Systems parameter menu. You may also raise this limit by entering the following command in the command window: “$::stepper_limit =<new_limit>;” where <new_limit> is the new number, i.e. 5000.

October 2013 139 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 140: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Figure 7-13 Cell Display And Layer Display

Cell Display Form

This form examines cell instances and displays those whose names match the name or one of the names selected. It marks each instance and can step to each through the stepper.

1. Press Cell Display on the Main Drawing Window Context menu under Display to open the Cell Display Form.

2. The Data Window at the top can be used at any time; if left blank, it indicates the entire data space will be used in a stepper query. Coordinates can be explicit, the Select button can be pressed to indicate a region from the Main Drawing window or the Current button

October 2013 140 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 141: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

can be pressed to indicate the current area in the Main Drawing window. The Clear button clears the coordinates from the data window.

3. Select one or more cell names from the list of cells. Select the first name with ML. Select additional names with <shift> or <ctrl> ML.

You may reduce the list of cells if you wish by entering a filter in the Cell Filter: text field. In a filter, the wild card character * represents zero or more characters.

You can press List Cells to refresh the list and cancel all selections. When working with multiple libraries, first select the library of interest on the lower status line (clicking on it so that it turns cyan) then press the “List Cells” button at the bottom of the form.

4. The 5 color cells used in the highlighting are shown under the list. The highlight may be outlined or filled. When one of the buttons is pressed, the values appear next to the selected cell names.

5. The “Frame Pix” values provide an extra margin to the display, useful for highlighting cells which are extremely small relative to the data space.

6. The “Data Mode” indicates if data should be drawn hierarchically (normal), drawn with only the cell’s geometric data (flat) or not drawn at all. This provides a way to hide the data in cells where drawing time is excessive.

7. The “Cell Name” option can turn the text on in the Drawing window.

8. The “Selected” label is adjacent to two buttons: “Draw Off” which indicates that selected cells should not be drawn, and “Normal” which returns selected cells to their default drawing parameters.

9. The “All Cells” label is adjacent to two buttons: “Draw Off” which turns of all cells, allowing for easier adjustment of a few cells and “Normal” which does a reset of all the cells.

10. The “Lower Left” option can highlight the lower left cell of all instances.

11. To proceed to the Stepper, press the button marked Stepper. A small stepping form will appear at the bottom of the Main Drawing window.

Figure 7-14 Stepper

12. On the stepping form, press First, Next, Last or Again to step through instances.

October 2013 141 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 142: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

The data is redrawn to focus on the first, next, previous or current instance which meets the search criteria and a dotted border is drawn around it. The location is reported on the menu. If no special drawing attributes have been selected, then a gray shaded highlight is used. You can press Selected: Normal after invoking the stepper to discontinue shading of the instances.

The option button selects a zoom distance. Larger values zoom out. Smaller values zoom in.

The Goto: text area allows you to type in the entry number you want to skip to. And the Clr button will clear the entry list.

Layer Display Form

This form applies a similar functionality to the visible layers. This form also depends on the currently selected library, and only lists layers visible in the Data Palette. To get the desired display, first select the library in the lower status line, select the layers through the Data Palette and make them visible, then press the List Layer button at the bottom of the form.

1. Press Layer Display on the Main Drawing Window Context menu under Display to open the Layer Display Form.

2. The Data Window at the top can be used at any time; if left blank, it indicates the entire data space will be used in a stepper query to find geometries. Coordinates can be explicit, the Select button can be pressed to indicate a region from the Main Drawing window or the Current button can be pressed to indicate the current area in the Main Drawing window. The All button clears the coordinates from the data window, meaning that the entire data space will be used.

3. Select one or more layer names from the list of layers. Select the first layer with ML. Select additional layers with <shift> or <ctrl> ML.

You may reduce the list of layers if you wish by entering a filter in the Layer Filter: text field. In a filter, the wild card character * represents zero or more characters.

You can press List Layer to refresh the list and cancel all selections. When working with multiple libraries, first select the library of interest on the lower status line (clicking on it so that it turns cyan) then press the “List Layers” button at the bottom of the form.

4. The 5 color cells used in the highlighting are 195 through 199. The highlights are filled. When one of the buttons is pressed, the colors appear next to the selected layer names.

5. The Hlt Origin button, if selected, can highlight the Origin cell of the geometries.

6. To clear the highlights, press the “Selected” button to clear highlights from selected layers or press “All Layers” to clear all geometry highlights.

October 2013 142 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 143: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

7. To bring up the geometry stepper, select the appropriate layers and press Stepper. The small stepper form explained above will appear, this time with geometry coordinates.

Text Display Form

This form is similar in design and functionality to those mentioned above, but it pertains to text elements. It matches selected text elements in the layout database file and provides for highlighting and stepping. All of the text elements of a library are listed, regardless of layer or visibility in the data palette. Additional text may be in the layout database file, as properties on geometries and references, but those are addressed in the next two forms.

1. Press Text Display on the Main Drawing Window Context menu under Display to open the Text Display Form.

2. The Data Window at the top can be used at any time; if left blank, it indicates the entire data space will be used in a stepper query to find text. Coordinates can be explicit, the Select button can be pressed to indicate a region from the Main Drawing window or the Current button can be pressed to indicate the current area in the Main Drawing window. The All button clears the coordinates from the data window, meaning that the entire data space will be used.

3. Select one or more text entries from the list of text. Select the first text with ML. Select additional text with <shift> or <ctrl> ML.

You may reduce the list of text entries if you wish by entering a filter in the Text Filter: text field. In a filter, the wild card character * represents zero or more characters.

You can press List Text to refresh the list and cancel all selections. When working with multiple libraries, first select the library of interest on the lower status line (clicking on it so that it turns cyan) then press the “List Text” button at the bottom of the form.

4. The 5 color cells used in the highlighting are 195 through 199. The highlights appear as semi-circles marking the origin of the text. When one of the buttons is pressed, the colors appear next to the selected text items.

5. The Hlt Origin button, if selected, can highlight the Origin cell of the text locations.

6. To clear the highlights, press the “Selected” button to clear highlights from selected text or press “All Text” to clear all geometry highlights.

7. To bring up the geometry stepper, select the appropriate text and press Stepper. The small stepper form explained above will appear, this time with text coordinates.

October 2013 143 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 144: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDrawing and Examining Data

Instance Property Form and the Geometry Property Form

These forms deal with GDSII properties attached to cell instances and to geometries. They select instances or geometries based on attached properties. GDSII properties come as attribute/value pairs, where the attribute is a number in the range of 0 - 127 and values are text strings. An instance or geometry will not have more than one property with a particular attribute number. Properties are typically used to annotate instances and geometries, with such uses as design revisions for instances, and DRC error messages or node names for geometries.

1. Press Inst Property or Geom Property on the Main Drawing Window Context menu under Display to open the appropriate property form. They are very similar.

2. The Data Window at the top can be used at any time; if left blank, it indicates the entire data space will be used in a stepper query to find text. Coordinates can be explicit, the Select button can be pressed to indicate a region from the Main Drawing window or the Current button can be pressed to indicate the current area in the Main Drawing window. The All button clears the coordinates from the data window, meaning that the entire data space will be used.

3. Select one or more entries from the list of property values. Select the first value with ML. Select additional values with <shift> or <ctrl> ML.

You may reduce the list of property values if you wish by entering a filter in the Value Filter: field. In a filter, the wild card character * represents zero or more characters. The Attribute Filter field allows the property numbers to be culled in the list. an entry of “1-20” lists only properties with attributes between 1 and 20.

You can press List Props to refresh the list and cancel all selections. When working with multiple libraries, first select the library of interest on the lower status line (clicking on it so that it turns cyan) then press the “List Props” button at the bottom of the form.

4. The 5 color cells used in the highlighting are 195 through 199. The highlights appear as rectangles around the area of interest. When one of the buttons is pressed, the colors appear next to the selected property values.

5. The Hlt Origin button, if selected, can highlight the Origin cell of the geometries.

6. To clear the highlights, press the “Selected” button to clear highlights from selected properties or press “All Prop” to clear all property highlights.

7. To bring up the property stepper, select the appropriate properties and press Stepper. The small stepper form explained above will appear, this time with property coordinates.

October 2013 144 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 145: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

8Viewing Layout Database Data

This chapter describes certain aspects of data selection and viewing which are unique to layout database data. It supplements the general information in Chapter 3, “Opening and Preparing Data,” and in Chapter 7, “Drawing and Examining Data.” Many of the parameters described below are found on the <Format> Parameters menus which can be accessed through the “Parameters” pull-down of the main drawing window.

Opening a Cell

After you read a GDSII file, you must open the cell that you wish to view. You can open the cell before or after setting culling and view depth and before or after setting draw attributes.

When opening a cell, first identify a specific file if more than one is currently in the system by clicking on its name in the Main Drawing window status line.

There are three ways to open a cell:

■ Set the Open Top Cell/Object After Reading a <Format> file: option to Yes.

This option is found on the Command Prefs panel of the Format’s Parameters menu and is the default setting.

■ You can also press Select <Format> Cells/Objects on the File pull-down of the Main Drawing window to open the Select Cell To Open window. When the window appears, select the desired cell.

You can close a cell with a close cell command or by opening another cell.

■ Close all open cells by selecting Close All <Format> Cells under the Cells/Objects on the File pull-down of the Main Drawing window.

The Draw the Top Cell when it is Opened option on the Command Prefs panel of the Format’s Parameters menu determines whether or not cells automatically draw when opened. You can open that menu from the Main Drawing window through the Parameters pull-down.

October 2013 145 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 146: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualViewing Layout Database Data

Memory Usage

When reading and drawing layout data, QuickView uses physical memory and other resources of your system. The memory usage parameters allow you to control the amount of memory which QuickView can use for these tasks. During layout database Stream read, the drawing cache is loaded up to the amount selected in the Cache MegaBytes per Library: option on Cache and Culling panel of the format’s Parameters Form. This allows for a shorter first draw time.

■ On systems which have large amounts of physical memory, you can increase the allowed memory usage. This minimizes disk swapping and data handling and provides optimum performance.

■ On systems with limited physical memory, you can limit the allowed memory usage. This conserves memory at the expense of disk swapping and data handling but allows you to read and draw your data without running out of memory.

■ When the drawing cache is set to 1 MByte, extra measures are taken to conserve memory during a Stream read. After reading the data, the drawing cache may then be increased to a larger number. This may allow files to be read which would not otherwise fit into memory, and still draw with a reasonable performance.

If you are viewing single files smaller than 64 megabytes or multiple files which total less than 64 megabytes and if the file size (or aggregate file size) is less than half the size of the physical memory on your system, there is no need to adjust the memory usage parameters.

For larger files, or on systems with less physical memory, you should set the memory usage parameters according to the following guidelines. You will notice that the calculations differ depending on whether or not you intend to read and draw multiple files at the same time.

1. If your system has physical memory more than twice the file size (for a single file) or more than twice the aggregate file size (for multiple files), set the Cache MegaBytes per Library: to the next step above the file size (for a single file) or to approximately the size of the largest file (for multiple files).

2. If your system has physical memory at least equal to the file size (for a single file) or at least equal to the aggregate file size (for multiple files), set the Cache MegaBytes per Library: to half the file size (for a single file) or to about half of the average file size (for multiple files).

3. If your system has physical memory less than the file size (for a single file) or less than the aggregate file size (for multiple files), set the Cache MegaBytes per Library: to a low value such as 16 megabytes or 8 megabytes for a single file or 8 megabytes for multiple files.

October 2013 146 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 147: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualViewing Layout Database Data

4. If you get an “out of memory” error after setting the Cache MegaBytes per Library: limit, then set the limit to a lower number. The one megabyte setting should allow reading and drawing to succeed in most cases although the reading and drawing times may be significantly longer.

Culling

Culling is a strategy which improves drawing speed by simplifying or discarding design features which are presumed to be mostly invisible or redundant in a particular view.

The culling parameters allows you to specify the amount of culling, if any, which should take place. Values range from 0 (no culling) to 17 (high culling). Culling is set once for all of the specified format’s files but separately for each drawing window. The default value is 10 (medium culling) in both windows.

The culling parameters can be found on the Cache and Culling panel of the Format’s Parameters menu. You can open that menu from the Main Drawing window through the Parameters pull-down.

Library Depth

Library depth specifies the number of levels of hierarchy that should be drawn.

Setting library depth to a lower number allows data to be drawn more quickly because less depth in the hierarchy is shown. Setting library depth to a higher number allows you to see more detail (depth) but increases draw time. Library depth is set separately for each Format’s file and for each drawing window. Values range from 0 to 512. The value 512 draws the entire hierarchy regardless of depth.

The library depth parameters can be found on the Library Depth panel of the Format’s Parameters menu. You can open that menu from the Main Drawing window through the Parameters pull-down.

Layer Names and Initial Attributes

When you select a layout database file for viewing, QuickView accesses the file and enters appropriate information in the Data Palette draw list. The draw list information includes a one-line description of each layer mentioned in the data for each drawing window.

October 2013 147 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 148: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualViewing Layout Database Data

By default, layers are referred to as layer 0, layer 1, layer 2, etc. Default draw attributes for color, drawn, visible and text are provided for each layer. For a description of this process, see Chapter 3, “Opening and Preparing Data.”

Data Browser

Figure 8-1 Data Browser

The Data Browser (found under the View -> Windows pull-down menu of the Main Drawing Window) enables you to see the hierarchy of the GDSII & OASIS data. The Data Browser presents the hierarchy of the loaded GDSII data in a tree format allowing you to expand and collapse different hierarchical branches by double clicking on different nodes in the displayed hierarchy.

October 2013 148 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 149: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualViewing Layout Database Data

Context Menu

Right clicking on a cell in the data browser will show a context menu with two options.

❑ View

The view option will change the current cell view for the associated database to match the cell selected in the data browser.

❑ Stepper

The Stepper option will identify all of the instances of the selected cell in the current viewing cell of the associated database. Each identified instance may be located using the stepper that is displayed at the bottom of the Main Drawing Window.

Limitations

QuickView has the following limitations which should be noted.

1. GDSII path elements with a negative width have the CALMA documented behavior that the widths do not change when the cell that contains them is magnified. At the present time, QuickView treats negative widths the same as positive widths.

October 2013 149 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 150: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualViewing Layout Database Data

October 2013 150 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 151: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

9Working With Images

QuickView provides a very convenient and powerful set of tools for working with data related images. The image tool set provide the following functionality:

■ Simultaneously overlay image and geometrical data.

■ Adjust size, position, & orientation to align the image data with geometrical data.

■ Capture the current drawing window to a standard image formats for sharing with customers or colleagues.

This chapter reviews the tools available in QuickView for working with and creating image files.

October 2013 151 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 152: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualWorking With Images

The Image Manager

The QuickView Image Manager serves as the cockpit for working with existing image files. The Image Manager is where the user will load image files into QuickView. After images are loaded into QuickView the Image Manager provides a set of tools for manipulating the images so that they may be aligned accurately with any loaded geometrical design data.

The image manager is displayed by selecting the Image - Overlay... option from the Tools menu in the Main Drawing window.

Figure 9-1 Image Manager

October 2013 152 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 153: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualWorking With Images

Overlaying Image Data

Overlaying image and geometrical data is automatic. The following steps outline the process for loading and overlaying image data in QuickView.

1. Load the desired geometrical database(s). (GDSII, OASIS, MEBES,...)

2. Position the geometrical data, as needed, using the orientation controls in the Data Palette.

3. Load the desired image file(s) using the ‘Add Image’ option under the File menu in the Image Manager.

4. Position the Image data using the orientation controls in the Image Manager. (These controls are described below.)

As soon as an image is loaded it is drawn in the Main Drawing Window. The image is positioned so that its lower left corner is located at the drawing area’s origin (0,0). The default size is set to 1 micron per pixel.

Figure 9-2 Default Image Overlay

October 2013 153 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 154: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualWorking With Images

Image Data Parameters

The Image Manager provides access to a set of image position and orientation parameters. Adjusting these parameters allows the user to position the image data so that it will align with any associated geometrical data that is also loaded into QuickView. These parameters may be accessed directly in the Image Manager’s Image Table by clicking on a value and then clicking on it again. Doing this will provide an entry field where updated values may be entered. If a value is not editable using this action, like Mirror and Rotation, then it may be modified by right clicking in the Image Table and choosing the desired value from the Image Table Context Menu.

Figure 9-3 Edit Image Parameters

The following image parameters may be adjusted to position, rotation, mirroring, and visibility of the image so that it may be aligned correctly with any corresponding geometrical data.

October 2013 154 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 155: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualWorking With Images

Editing Multiple Selected Images

When interacting with the Image Table a user is only able to update the values of one image at a time. In some instances it is convenient to simultaneously update the parameters of multiple images to a common value. For example a user may wish to simultaneously set the rotation of several images to ‘90’ degrees. Applying a value like this to multiple selected images is done using the Selection Editor.

In order to use the Selection Editor for this task the user must select all of the images that they wish to update and then displaying the Selection Editor using the corresponding option under the ‘Edit’ menu or the Image Table’s right click context menu.

Tip

Multiple selections are made using combinations of shift and control click interactions.

Table 9-1 Image Position And Orientation Parameters

Parameter Description

File Identifies the corresponding image with a preview icon and the full path to the Image data file.

X The horizontal offset of the Image’s lower left corner from the origin of the drawing area.

Y The vertical offset of the Image’s lower left corner from the origin of the drawing area.

Mag The magnification applied to the image from its default or micron/pixel size.

Rot The rotation of the image from its native orientation. All rotations are in the counter clockwise direction. (0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees)

Mir The mirror state. When the mirror value is set to Yes the image will be mirrored about the horizontal axis. The image is mirrored before it is rotated.

Vis The visibility state indicates if the image will be drawn or visible in the drawing window.

October 2013 155 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 156: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualWorking With Images

Figure 9-4 Selection Editor

The Selection Editor is automatically set with the values from the first selected image in the Image Table when it is displayed. The user may modify any of the column values and specify which ones will be updated by setting the check boxes on the left so that they are pressed/checked.

Clicking the OK or Apply button will update the marked/checked column values for each selected image in the Image Table.

October 2013 156 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 157: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualWorking With Images

Resizing Image Data

The general controls in the Image Table allow a user to position and orient the images loaded into the image manager but the user cannot adjust an image’s size beyond specifying a magnification value. The Image Manager provides access an image’s size attributes through the Resize Selection Editor. The resize selection editor is displayed using the corresponding option under the ‘Edit’ menu or the Image Table’s right click context menu. The Resize Selection Editor behaves similarly to the standard Selection Editor by updating the size attributes for all selected images in the Image Table when the user clicks the OK or Apply buttons.

Figure 9-5 Resize Selection Editor

The Resize Selection Editor provides four different methods for resizing the selected images.

Table 9-2 Resize Selection Editor Sizing Methods

Resize Method Description

Original Size The original size method will set the image dimensions to 1 micron per pixel.

Predefined width x height

This method will set the image width and height to match the dimensions of the selected database.

October 2013 157 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 158: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualWorking With Images

Figure 9-6 Image Overlay Predefined Width And Height Example

Custom width x height This method allows the user to specify the exact dimensions of the image. This method also includes the option to force a fixed aspect ratio.

Percent of original size This method will directly scale the width and height of the original image size (1micron per pixel) by the specified percentage.

Table 9-2 Resize Selection Editor Sizing Methods

Resize Method Description

October 2013 158 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 159: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualWorking With Images

Auto Alignment Tools

In addition to the standard controls the Image Manager provides a few tools for automatically sizing and positioning an image. These features provide quick and convenient mechanisms for aligning an image to other features in the drawing window.

Fit Into Rectangle

The fit into rectangle method will prompt the user to select a rectangle in the Main Drawing Window. After the rectangle is selected the image will automatically be positioned and resized to fit in the specified area.

The fit into rectangle operation is initiated by selecting the corresponding option from the Images Manager Edit menu or the Image Table’s Context Menu. Selecting one of these options will prompt the user in the Main Drawing Window to select the rectangle area where the image will be placed. The selection is done by selecting one of the rectangle corners using the middle mouse button or one of the identified feature selection hot keys. After the first corner is selected the operation is completed by selecting the opposite corner of the rectangle using the same method. When the rectangle selection is finished the image will be automatically sized and positioned in the area marked by the rectangle boundary.

Align With Layout

The align with layout will prompt the user to select a pair of points in the image and a pair of corresponding points in the layout. When the four coordinate points are selected QuickView will automatically calculate the size and position of the image so that the two points selected in the image align with the two points selected in the layout.

Caution

The pairs of points must have dx and dy values greater than zero or an error message will be generated.

October 2013 159 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 160: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualWorking With Images

Figure 9-7 Image Overlay Align with Layout

1) Select Image Points 2) Select Layout Points

Result

October 2013 160 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 161: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

10Connectivity

QuickView provides a set of tools for extracting and inspecting connectivity nets within a database. The connectivity tool set provides the following functionality.

■ Automatically extract and highlight a connectivity net starting at a specific coordinate in a design based on the layer to layer connectivity defined in the applied QuickView Technology Definition.

■ Perform a point to point analysis in an extracted net.

This chapter reviews the tools available in QuickView for working with connectivity.

October 2013 161 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 162: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualConnectivity

The Connectivity Manager

The QuickView Connectivity Manager serves as the cockpit for extracting and working with connectivity nets.

The Connectivity Manager is displayed by clicking on the connectivity icon in the View Toolbar or through the Status fly-out in the Drawing Window Context menu.

Figure 10-1 Connectivity Manager

The Connectivity Manager consists of two parts.

■ Nets

The nets section lists all of the nets that were extracted in the current QuickView session and it provides options for adding, removing, & exporting nets.

■ Point To Point Analysis

The point to point analysis section lists all of the point to point calculations performed on the currently selected net for the current QuickView Session.

October 2013 162 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 163: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualConnectivity

Extracting A Connectivity Net

Nets are added to the Nets Table using one of three different operations.

Select A New Net

The Select A New Net icon is used to extract a net based on a single (x,y) coordinate. Clicking on this icon will initiate an interaction prompt in the Main Drawing Window where the net selection is completed by middle clicking inside one of the shapes in the net to extract. After selecting a starting point QuickView will begin tracing the net polygon by polygon based on the layer connectivity defined in the Technology Definition applied to the current database.

Figure 10-2 Extracted Net Example

October 2013 163 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 164: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualConnectivity

Select Nets In A Window

When presses the parameters icon will display the Window Based Net Selection options. When these options are enable the net selection will be limited to polygons in the window or rectangular area specified by the Left, Bottom, Right, Top coordinate values. There are two convenience icons to the right of the coordinate fields for selecting the net selection window in the drawing window or simply setting the selection window to the current viewing area.

Point To Point Net Selection

The Point To Point icon is used to extract a net between two different (x,y) coordinates while simultaneously performing a Point To Point Analysis. Clicking on this icon will initiate an interaction prompt in the Main Drawing Window where the two coordinates are selected. QuickView will then begin tracing the net between the two coordinates. When the net extraction is complete only the portion of the net between the two points will be highlighted and a new point to point analysis will be added to the Point To Point table along with the new net.

Figure 10-3 Extract Net and Point To Point Selection Example

October 2013 164 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 165: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualConnectivity

The Net Table

In addition to displaying a list of available nets the Net Table allows you to make a net visible or not visible as well as change the net highlight color. These options are available by right clicking on a net in the table which will display the right click context menu.

Important

For more information about connectivity in Technology Definitions see Defining Connectivity on page 102.

Important

Nets are only extracted for the current database during a new net selection.

Exporting Nets To External Geometrical Databases

The nets listed in the Connectivity Manager’s Nets Table may be extracted to an external Geometrical database by clicking on the Export Net icon. This operation will extract each shape in the selected net and output a geometrical database maintaining the layer information and locations for each net shape so that they can be shared and/or overlaid on related data for inspection and comparison.

Point To Point Analysis

After a net is extracted and selected in the Connectivity Manager’s Nets Table point to point analysis may be performed to extract information like the distance and resistance between two points in the net. A new point to point analysis is performed by clicking on the Select New Point To Point Analysis icon. This will initiate an interaction prompt in the Main Drawing Window where the two points in the net are selected by middle clicking or using the standard measurement and selection hot keys (e - edge, c - corner, i - intersection, n - center). After the two points are selected QuickView will analyze the current net between the two points calculating the distance and resistance. When the analysis is completed it is added to the Point To Point Analysis Table for review.

Double clicking on an existing Point To Point Analysis in the table will highlight it again in the drawing window for the current net.

October 2013 165 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 166: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualConnectivity

Figure 10-4 Point To Point Net Analysis Example

October 2013 166 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 167: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

11Database Utilities

QuickView provides a set of utilities for performing various different database operations. Here is a list of some of the operations that may be performed using the QuickView Database Utilities.

■ Merge multiple different cells from one or more databases under a new Top Cell in a standalone database.

■ Convert a database from one format to another.

■ Replace cell(s) in one database with cells from another database.

This chapter reviews the different database utilities available in QuickView.

October 2013 167 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 168: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDatabase Utilities

Database Merge Utility

The QuickView Database Merge Utility will merge cells from one or more similarly formatted databases into a new standalone database. The generated database will consist of a new top cell with cell references to the cells that were merged from the input databases.

The DB Merge Utility is accessed from the Tools Menu in the Main Drawing window.

Figure 11-1 Database Merge Utility

Important

Currently the database merge utility only supports GDSII and OASIS.

Format

When working with the DB Merge Utility the first thing that needs to be set is the Format option located at the top of the window. DB Merge currently supports GDSII and OASIS and only databases of the same format can be merged into a new output database.

Input Databases - (Cells)

The input databases table lists all of the cells that will be merged together in the output database. The database cells in this list are managed using the Add and Remove icons at the top of the window.

October 2013 168 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 169: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDatabase Utilities

Adding Input Database Cells

Clicking on the add icon will display the Merge DB Selector which will list all of the cells currently being displayed in QuickView for the specified DB Merge format.

Figure 11-2 Database Merge Utility Selector

The listed cell can be added by selecting the desired cells and clicking the OK button. This will add the selected cells to the Input Databases list with the current offset, rotation, mirror, and magnification values applied in the Data Palette.

Optionally a cell can be added from a database that is not loaded into QuickView using the file open icon in the Merge DB Selector which will display an Open File Dialog for selecting the external database. When an external database is chosen the cell name, offset, rotation, mirror, and magnification values will need to be entered manually into the Input Databases table. The Input Database table is made editable by clicking twice on a cell which will provide an input prompt for manual entry.

Output Database

When the DB Merge operation runs it generates a new output database file with a new top cell where the listed input database cells are instanced. The Output Database section specifies the file path for the new database and the name of the new top cell that will be created.

October 2013 169 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 170: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDatabase Utilities

Merging Data

The listed database cells will be merged generating a new database by clicking on the run merge utility icon at the top of the window.

Parameters

The DB Merge Parameters can be displayed by clicking on the parameters icon a the top of the window. when the parameters are displayed the icon will remain pressed. The parameters can be hidden by clicking on the parameters icon again.

Figure 11-3 Database Merge Utility Parameters

The following table describes the different DB Merge Parameters

.Table 11-1 DB Merge Parameters

Parameter Description

Log Messages Specifies the level of output messages generated in the Log Window by the DB Merge Batch Utility when the merge operation is running.

Auto Load Output When this option is pressed or checked the output database will be automatically loaded into QuickView when the DB Merge operation is completed.

October 2013 170 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 171: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDatabase Utilities

Auto Show Log Window When this option is pressed or checked the Log Window will automatically be displayed or popped up when a DB Merge operation is initiated.

Table 11-1 DB Merge Parameters

Parameter Description

October 2013 171 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 172: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDatabase Utilities

Database Convert Utility

The QuickView DB Convert Utility will convert a database from one format to another generating a new output database.

The DB Merge Utility is accessed from the Tools Menu in the Main Drawing window.

Figure 11-4 Database Convert Utility

Important

Currently the convert utility only supports GDSII->OASIS and OASIS->GDSII conversions.

Input Database

The input database can be selected using the DB Convert Database Selector which will list all of the GDSII and OASIS databases currently loaded in QuickView. Selecting one of the databases from the list and clicking OK will enter the database’s file path to the Output File field. If the database that needs to be converted in not in the list it may be selected using the File Open icon Convert Database Selector which will display an Open File Dialog for selecting the external database file.

October 2013 172 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 173: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDatabase Utilities

Figure 11-5 Database Convert Utility DB Selector

Output Database

The output database will automatically be the opposite format of the input database and the entered file path should reflect that. For example if the input database is a GDSII file then the output file should be pointing to an OASIS file that will be generated by the conversion process. The output file can be selected using the file open icon which will display a Save File Dialog for selecting the file to create.

Parameters

The DB Convert Parameters can be displayed by clicking on the parameters icon a the top of the window. When the parameters are displayed the icon will remain pressed. The parameters can be hidden by clicking on the parameters icon again.

October 2013 173 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 174: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDatabase Utilities

Figure 11-6 Database Convert Utility Parameters

The following table describes the different DB Convert Parameters

.Table 11-2 DB Convert Parameters

Parameter Description

Layer Map File The layer map file that is used to tie the GDSII Layer Number and Data Type to a specific Layer Name.

Missing Layer Maps This option determines what happens when a layer is found in the input file that is not found in the layer mapping files.

Log Messages Specifies the level of output messages generated in the Log Window by the DB Conversion Batch Utility when the merge operation is running.

Non Standard AREFs Specifies how non standard AREF structures will be processed.

OASIS Compression The modal compression level in output OASIS databases. Larger values will result in extended conversion times.

Auto Load Output When this option is pressed or checked the output database will be automatically loaded into QuickView when the DB Conversion operation is completed.

October 2013 174 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 175: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDatabase Utilities

Layer Mapping Files

The layer mapping files are found in the Database Convert Parameters and they are fundamental in being able to control how the difference between the GDSII Number/Data Type and Oasis Layer Names are handled during the conversion process.

Layer Map File Format

The layer mapping file format has one of two forms.

LayerName1 LayerNumber1 LayerDataType1LayerName2 LayerNumber2 LayerDataType2...

OR

LayerName1 LayerPurpose1 LayerNumber1 LayerDataType1LayerName2 LayerPurpose2 LayerNumber2 LayerDataType2...

No Layer Mapping Files

GDSII -> OASIS

The output OASIS layers names will be generated in the form LAY_<GDSII Layer Number>_<GDSII Data Type>.

OASIS -> GDSII

The output GDSII layers numbers and data types will match those found in the OASIS database.

Auto Show Log Window When this option is pressed or checked the Log Window will automatically be displayed or popped up when a DB Conversion operation is initiated.

Table 11-2 DB Convert Parameters

Parameter Description

October 2013 175 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 176: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDatabase Utilities

Layer Mapping File

GDSII -> OASIS

Output OASIS layer names will be found by searching in the layer mapping file for the corresponding layer numbers and data types. If an input layer number and data type is not found in the specified layer mapping file the result will depend on the specified Missing Layer Maps parameter.

OASIS -> GDSII

Layer numbers and data types will be found by searching in the layer mapping file for the corresponding layer names. If an input layer name is not found in the specified layer mapping file the result will depend on the specified Missing Layer Maps parameter.

Converting The Data

The input database will be converted generating a new database by clicking on the run conversion utility icon at the top of the window.

October 2013 176 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 177: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDatabase Utilities

Database Stream Replace Utility

The QuickView DB Stream Replace Utility will replace one or more cells definitions in the database being processed with cell definitions from the cell source database generating a new output database.

The DB Stream Replace Utility is accessed from the Tools Menu in the Main Drawing window.

Figure 11-7 Database Stream Replace Utility

Important

Currently the stream replace utility only supports GDSII.

Cell Replacement Mappings

The cell replacement mapping table lists the names of the cells that will be replaced in the database being processed and the names of the cells from the cell source database that they will be replaced with.

Adding A Cell Replacement Mapping

Cell mappings are added using the Add New Cell Replacement Mapping icon. Clicking this icon will add new row to the table with the default cell values “OriginalCell” & “ReplacementCell” respectively. The actual cell names need to be edited manually by clicking twice on the value in the table. Clicking twice will provide an input prompt allowing the two cell names to be entered.

October 2013 177 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 178: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDatabase Utilities

Input/Output

The input and output section defines which databases will be process and the name of the output file that will be generated containing the replaced cells. The following table outlines the different input and output values.

.

Parameters

The DB Stream Replace Parameters can be displayed by clicking on the parameters icon a the top of the window. When the parameters are displayed the icon will remain pressed. The parameters can be hidden by clicking on the parameters icon again.

Table 11-3 DB Stream Replaces Input/Output Values

Parameter Description

Cell To Process The name of the cell in the database being processed where the search for cells being replaced will be performed.

DB To Process The database that will be searched for cells being replaced.

Cell Source DB The database containing the replacement cell definitions.

Output File The path to the output file that will be generated by the DB Stream Replace process.

October 2013 178 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 179: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDatabase Utilities

Figure 11-8 Database Stream Replace Utility Parameters

The following table describes the different DB Convert Parameters

.Table 11-4 DB Stream Replace Parameters

Parameter Description

Auto Replace When this option is selected any identified missing cells in the database being process are automatically replaced with the cell definitions having the same name in the cell source database.

Auto Rename This option determines how to deal with the situation where cells being inserted in the database being process from the cell source database have sub cells that conflict with cell definitions currently in the database being processed. Generally in this situation the stream replace utility will simply rename the sub cells in order to prevent conflicts. If the Only When Different option is chosen the sub cells will be compared and renamed only when they are different and when they are the same the cell definition in the database being processed is used.

October 2013 179 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 180: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualDatabase Utilities

Running Stream Replace

The listed replacement cell mappings will be applied generating a new database by clicking on the run stream replace utility icon at the top of the window.

Log Messages Specifies the level of output messages generated in the Log Window by the DB Stream Replace Batch Utility when the merge operation is running.

Auto Load Output When this option is pressed or checked the output database will be automatically loaded into QuickView when the DB Stream Replace operation is completed.

Auto Show Log Window When this option is pressed or checked the Log Window will automatically be displayed or popped up when a DB Stream Replace operation is initiated.

Table 11-4 DB Stream Replace Parameters

Parameter Description

October 2013 180 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 181: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

12Viewing Job Decks

This chapter describes certain aspects of data selection and viewing which are unique to job decks. It supplements the general information in Chapter 3, “Opening and Preparing Data,” and in Chapter 7, “Drawing and Examining Data.”

MEBES and CORE

MEBES job decks serve as input to MEBES electron beam (E- beam) writing systems and to CORE laser pattern generator systems.

In general, MEBES and CORE systems generate identical pattern data although run-time parameters can introduce differences. MEBES and CORE define and generate titles very differently

QuickView parses, draws and examines job decks according to the rules of either system.

Parsing Job Decks

When you select a job deck for viewing, QuickView performs an analysis of the job deck which this manual refers to as a parse. During the parse, the contents of the job deck are analyzed, tabulated and checked for consistency. Checks are made to determine whether or not the patterns referenced by the job deck are present and whether or not the pattern address size matches the address size specified in the job deck. A similar process takes place when job decks are written to masks or reticles.

Parse Commands

When you select a job deck for viewing, QuickView parses it using the Job Parse Command shown in the MEBES Job Parse Options menu found under the Parameters-> MEBES pull-down. Before selecting a file, you may, of course, select a different parse command.

October 2013 181 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 182: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualViewing Job Decks

MEBES parse commands use MEBES parse rules. When you view the job deck, titles are drawn as MEBES titles and drawing options which apply only to the E-beam are available.

CORE parse commands use CORE parse rules. Under these rules, job deck commands and options which are not relevant to CORE are discarded or rejected. When you view the job deck, titles are drawn as CORE labels and certain viewing options which pertain only to MEBES are not available

You may select parse commands which generate different levels of documentation. Basic commands report errors and warnings only. “Echo” commands echo each job deck line to the Information and Errors window as it is parsed. “Describe” commands describe each job deck line fully as it is parsed.

After an initial parse, you may issue additional parse commands by MR on data header and choosing a parse command from the data header Context menu.

You can halt a parse command which has duration by pressing the Interrupt on the View Toolbar.

Parse Status

Each job deck which has been selected for viewing has a parse status. The parse status is shown in the Data Palette draw list following the job deck name. The following states are possible:

■ <mebes...> or <core...> means parsing is currently in progress.

■ <unparsed> means parsing was interrupted before completion.

■ <mebes ok> or <core ok> means parsing completed with no error or warning.

■ <mebes wrn> or <core wrn> means parsing completed with warnings but no errors. You may wish to check the Information and Errors window before proceeding.

■ <mebes err> or <core err> means parsing failed because of one or more errors.

Parse Errors

When a job deck is parsed, error or warning conditions may be found. If this happens, information is sent to the Information and Errors window. The information includes a description of the problem and the precise place where it was detected, including the name of the file, the line number and the character position. This information should help you locate and diagnose the problem.

October 2013 182 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 183: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualViewing Job Decks

If an error is found, you cannot view the job deck until it is corrected. If a warning is reported, you can view the job deck without correcting it if you wish.

A variety of errors and warnings are possible. The list below mentions some common problems and suggests possible remedies. Some of the remedies refer to options which are explained later in this chapter.

After you take corrective action, you can reparse a job deck by issuing a parse command as explained previously. If you edit a job deck, you can issue a new parse command as soon as you save the file to disk. It is not necessary to re-select it.

■ Syntax errors occur when something in a job deck does not conform to prescribed format. You can fix them by editing the job deck.

■ Missing patterns are reported when patterns referenced in a job deck cannot be found. You can fix the problem by changing the setting of the Missing Patterns option or by using the Job Pattern Directories menu to supply the pathname of the directory where the patterns can be found.

■ Address mismatch is reported if the pattern address size in the job deck does not match the address size in the pattern file. You can fix the problem by changing the setting of the Address Mismatch option or by editing the job deck to provide a consistent address size.

■ If a slice code error is reported, you can check the value of the MEBES Slice Type option or the CORE Suppress SLICE Command option or take other action as necessary.

■ If a net writing address error is reported, be sure the options for net writing address minimum and maximum are set properly and take other action as necessary.

■ If commands or options are rejected by CORE, you can either remove the offending items from the job deck or use a MEBES parse command.

Parse Options

There are options and parameters which you can select which affect the manner in which a job deck is parsed. Some of them correspond to run-time parameters of a MEBES or CORE system.

Job Parse Options appear on the Job Parse Options menu and on the Job Pattern Directories menu. You can open these menus from the Parameters -> MEBES pull-down of the Main Drawing window.

October 2013 183 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 184: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualViewing Job Decks

General Parse Options

General Parse Options appear on the Job Parse Options menu. They apply to both MEBES and CORE. Their main purpose is to allow you to specify how QuickView should respond in certain situations.

■ Missing Patterns controls the QuickView response when job deck patterns cannot be found.

Error means that each missing patterns is treated as an error.

Warning means that a warning is issued when a pattern cannot be found but the parse does not fail.

No Report means that the parse continues and no warning is issued.

If the parse succeeds, the draw commands represent missing patterns with small diamond shape at the specified location.

■ Empty Patterns controls the QuickView response when job deck patterns are empty.

Error means that each empty pattern is treated as an error.

Warning means that a warning is issued when an empty pattern is found but the parse does not fail.

No Report means that the parse continues and no warning is issued.

■ Address Mismatch controls the QuickView response when pattern address size does not match the address size specified in a job deck.

Error means that the pattern address size for all patterns must match the job deck address size if the pattern can be s found.

However, if virtual addressing is specified, the job deck address size may be either the same as the pattern address size or exactly twice the pattern address size. This variance is allowed because a job deck may provide the net writing address required for virtual addressing either by doubling the address size or by adjusting the scale factor.

Warning means that a warning is issued when address size mismatch occurs but the parse does not fail.

No Report means that the parse continues and no warning is issued

If the parse succeeds, QuickView, like MEBES and CORE systems, uses the address size specified in the job deck. The address size in the pattern is always treated as a comment.

October 2013 184 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 185: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualViewing Job Decks

■ At First Error allows you to stop a parse command at the first reported error or to let errors accumulate if possible.

■ Identify Levels By allows you to identify job deck levels in the Data Palette by level number or by M Title. If by M Title, you may further specify that the left or right part of a title should be used if the text is too long for the menu. A level which has no M Title is always identified by number.

■ Net Writing Address detects any net writing address which lies outside the allowable range (0.025 to 1.1 microns) or outside a range which you specify.

■ Report Excluded Commands/Options allows you to control the reporting of job deck commands and options which MEBES or CORE do not use.

MEBES accepts all legal commands except OFID which it ignores.

CORE excludes a number of commands which are not relevant. It treats some excluded commands as errors. Others trigger warning messages or are simply ignored.

This option directs QuickView to report unused commands: If Error, If Error Or Warning, or In Each Case.

MEBES Parse Options

MEBES Parse Options appear on the Job Parse Options menu. They represent parameters which you can specify when writing a job deck with an E-beam writing system.

■ Slice Type is equivalent to E-beam parameter MPARAM2:31.

Standard Processing means that job deck SLICE codes are interpreted as type I (standard) slice codes with no implicit circular array limit.

Die Limit Implied means that job deck SLICE codes are interpreted as type II (die limit implied) slice codes. Each slice code implies a circular array limit and may indicate a substrate size different from an identical type I slice code.

■ Default PFP Grid Factor is equivalent to E-beam parameter MPARAM2:110.

If a job deck specifies multi-phase printing but does not specify a grid factor, this value is used when the parse checks the net writing address. When the job deck is drawn, it may also be used if Double Fetch is in effect. See Arbitrary Overlap and Double Fetch under Patterns and Job Decks in Chapter 7, “Drawing and Examining Data.”

October 2013 185 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 186: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualViewing Job Decks

CORE Parse Options

CORE Parse Options appear on the Job Parse Options menu. They represent parameters which you can supply when using a CORE laser pattern generator system.

■ Remap Level Numbers directs the CORE job deck translation to remap job deck level numbers into the range 1 to 50. If this option is selected, fifty different level numbers may be referenced in a job deck. Otherwise only level numbers in the range 1 to 50 may be referenced.

QuickView does not actually remap level numbers. It merely determines whether or not the level numbers which occur would be acceptable to a CORE system.

■ Suppress ORIENT Commands directs the parse rules to discard all job deck Orient commands.

■ Suppress SLICE Command directs the parse rules to discard the job deck Slice command and to use the Default Plate Size (see below) instead.

■ Supply OPTION M supplies job deck OPTION M (mirror) for every job deck level that does not already have it.

■ Supply OPTION R supplies job deck OPTION R (reverse tone) for every job deck level that does not already have it.

■ Supply OPTION T supplies job deck OPTION T (title mirror) for every job deck level that does not already have it.

■ Default Plate Size specifies one of twelve possible plate sizes. This value is used in place of a Slice Code when the Suppress SLICE Command option (see above) is selected.

■ Default Address Size supplies an address size to be used if no address size is specified in a job deck.

■ Default Scale Factor supplies a scale factor to be used if no scale factor is specified in a job deck.

■ Apply CORE System Defaults sets all CORE Parse Options to the values which a CORE system uses if values are not supplied in a jcltrans.cfg file.

Pattern Directory Options

The Job Pattern Directories menu maintains the Job Pattern Directory list. You can open this menu from the Main Drawing window Parameters-> MEBES pull-down.

October 2013 186 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 187: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualViewing Job Decks

Using this menu, you can provide the pathnames of up to five directories where job deck patterns can be found. The directory paths form a search list. They are similar to the four directory paths which users of a MEBES system can specify via E-beam parameters MPARAM2:70-73.

The Job Pattern Directories menu has Select, Delete and Retrieve buttons for each pathname slot:

■ Select opens a directory selection menu. When you select a directory and press the OK button, the directory path appears in the appropriate slot in the Job Pattern Directories menu.

■ Delete removes a pathname from the menu line and places it in the Deleted Path line at the bottom of the menu.

■ Retrieve retrieves a pathname from the Deleted Path line if one is shown there.

Alternate use of Delete and Retrieve can change the order of pathnames in the list.

Job Deck Titles

When pattern data is written to a mask or reticle, titles are usually also written. Titles identify the mask or reticle and its contents and the conditions under which it was created.

Job deck titles are defined first by TITLE and ORIENT commands in the job deck. A MEBES writing system often adds to the job deck title information by using values from its MPARAM7 run time parameter file. A CORE system often adds to or overrides job deck title information by using values from a jcltrans.cfg file or system defaults. Even if titles are defined the same, MEBES and CORE always write them quite differently.

This topic provides information which you need in order to draw and examine titles as a MEBES and/or CORE system might draw them.

QuickView can draw titles as text only or as text in a box according to the setting of the Text attribute in the Data Palette draw list. See Text under Setting Draw Attributes in Chapter 4, “Data Palette.” The boxes, which show maximum title extent, are for viewing purposes only.

It should be noted that in CORE parlance titles are usually called “labels.”

Title Size and Location

Even if defined the same, MEBES titles and CORE labels always differ significantly in size and location.

October 2013 187 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 188: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualViewing Job Decks

■ MEBES title characters are 1152 microns high (504 address units high for the S Title). The job deck title magnification option can change the 1152 value (but not the 504 value) by 2x, 3x, or 4x.

CORE label characters are 1152 microns high (512 microns high for the S TITLE) or any height which you specify. The job deck title magnification option is not allowed.

■ MEBES title character width is 7/9 of the character height.

CORE label character width is 5/9 of the character height.

■ MEBES titles have a fixed maximum length: 30 for M, D and I Title; 40 for J Title; 60 for S Title; 25 or 26 for P Title; 15 for N Title; and between 1 and 10 for N Title.

CORE labels have whatever length you specify. The default is 60 for the S Title and 30 for all others. CORE has no J Title.

■ MEBES titles, if left justified, are drawn with the lower left corner of the first character at the specified location. If right justified, the text is shifted right until the rightmost character reaches the maximum length position.

CORE labels are drawn so the center of a box which would enclose the maximum length label is at the specified location. If the label is left justified, it is written at the left end of the box; if right justified, at the right end.

■ MEBES title characters rotate individually and/or with the title as specified by the job deck title and character rotation options or in run-time parameters. MEBES applies rotation first and mirroring second if both are specified.

CORE label characters rotate only with the title as specified by the job deck title rotation option or through the Label Rotation option. The job deck character rotation option is not allowed. CORE applies rotation first and mirroring second if both are specified but reverses the order if mirroring is specified in a job deck orient command title mirror option.

MEBES Title Options

A MEBES system frequently supplements job deck title information at run time with values from its MPARAM7 parameter file.

For viewing purposes, you can supply comparable values through the Job Title Options menu. You can open this menu from the Parameters-> MEBES pull-down of the Main Drawing window. The values which apply to a job deck parsed with a MEBES parse command are found on the left side of the menu.

October 2013 188 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 189: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualViewing Job Decks

■ Title Location Options in the upper portion of the menu specify X and Y values for seven title types and 13 slice codes or plate sizes. S Title location can only be specified in the job deck.

The option button near the top of the menu area selects a slice code or plate size. The text fields allow you to view and set values. The text fields are linked to the value of the option button. All values are in microns relative to the lower left corner of the plate.

For the J Title, the specified values are used whenever the title is drawn. For other titles, the values are used when location values are needed but not provided in a job deck.

■ Title Orientation Options in the upper portion of the menu specify rotation, character rotation, justification, and mirror values for eight title types. The values apply for all slice codes and plate sizes.

To set values, highlight a title type line with ML and press appropriate buttons at the bottom of the menu area.

For the J Title, the specified values are used whenever the title is drawn. For other titles, the values are used when orientation values are needed but not provided in a job deck.

For the N, P and T Titles, right justification may be specified but has no effect.

■ N Title text can be set in the lower portion of the menu.

On the E-beam it is not necessary to supply a text since the N Title text is the master serial number, which is known. The master serial number consists of up to 9 digits with an optional one digit suffix. The N Title is drawn if a D, M, I, S or J Title is drawn.

■ P Title text can be set in the lower portion of the menu.

On the E-beam it is not necessary to supply a text since the P Title text is the program and machine configuration, which is known. The text is a string of 25 or 26 characters. The P Title is drawn if a D, M, I, S or J Title is drawn.

■ T Title text consists of 15 characters giving the day, month, year, hour and minute. The T Title is drawn if a D, M, I, S or J Title is drawn.

■ J Title values can be set in the lower portion of the menu.

You can provide up to 40 characters for the text. You can also specify magnification and job deck level. The J Title is drawn on request. J Title options cannot be specified in a job deck.

October 2013 189 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 190: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualViewing Job Decks

CORE Label Options

A CORE system frequently supplements job deck title information with values from a jcltrans.cfg file or with system defaults. If the Suppress ORIENT Commands parse option is in effect, it replaces job deck title information with values from those sources.

For viewing purposes, you can supply comparable values through the Job Title Options menu. You can open this menu from the Parameters->MEBES pull-down of the Main Drawing window. The values which apply to a job deck parsed with a CORE parse command are found on the right side of the menu.

■ Label Location Options in the upper portion of the menu specify X and Y values for six title types and 12 plate sizes. S Title location can only be specified in the job deck. CORE does not support a J Title.

The option button near the top of the menu area selects a plate size. The text fields allow you to view and set values. The text fields are linked to the value of the option button. All values are in microns relative to the lower left corner of the plate.

Location values specified here are used when location values are needed but not provided in a job deck or if the Suppress ORIENT Commands parse option is in effect.

■ Label Height values can be viewed and set in the upper portion of the menu. The default character height is 1152 microns for human readable titles and 512 microns for the S Title. You can specify different values if you wish. Values apply for all plate sizes.

■ Label Length values can be viewed and set in the upper right portion of the menu. The default label length is 30 characters for human readable titles and 60 characters for the S Title. You can specify different values if you wish. Values apply for all plate sizes.

■ Label Justification and Label Rotation values can be viewed and set near the middle of the menu.

The values are used when values are needed but not provided in a job deck or if the Suppress ORIENT Commands parse option is in effect. Values apply for all plate sizes and title types.

■ N Title values can be set in the lower portion of the menu.

The N Title is drawn at your request. When you specify that the title should be drawn, the text is also displayed in the menu.

The text consists of the sequential plate number with an optional prefix and/or suffix. You may specify a length for the plate number and a prefix and/or suffix string. The default plate number length is 5 characters. The prefix and suffix are limited to 15 characters each.

October 2013 190 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 191: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualViewing Job Decks

■ P Title values can be set in the lower portion of the menu.

The P Title is drawn at your request. When you specify that the title should be drawn, the text is also displayed in the menu.

The text consists of the hardware version, the machine id and the software version. You may specify a length for each component. The default lengths are 11, 13 and 11 characters respectively.

■ T Title values can be set in the lower portion of the menu.

The T Title is drawn at your request. When you specify that the title should be drawn, the text is also displayed in the menu.

The text gives the day, month, year, hour, minute and second. The default length is 18 characters. You may specify a different length.

■ Apply CORE System Defaults sets all CORE Label options to the values which a CORE system uses if values are needed but not supplied in a jcltrans.cfg file.

October 2013 191 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 192: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualViewing Job Decks

October 2013 192 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 193: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

13Save and Restore Operations

QuickView has various functions which capture system states so that you can return to them later as desired. These functions can help you avoid repetitious effort, provide consistency and expedite processing.

This chapter describes all significant save and restore operations. Some operations which are described here are also mentioned or described elsewhere in the manual.

Saving and Restoring Window Placement

You can capture the current QuickView window configuration and return to it later using Save Placement and Restore Placement on the View -> Windows-> Placements pull-down of the Main Drawing window.

■ Save Default records size and location information in the file .ui_placement. This file is created in ~/.cds_quickview directory.

■ Save As allows you to save additional window placements

■ Remove will bring up a pop up that will allow you to remove saved placements

■ Load allows you to load the saved or default placements.

Saving and Restoring Hot Keys

If you add, delete or modify hot keys and you wish the changes to persist into future QuickView sessions, use the Save Keys button on the Hot Key Utility menu to save the hotkeys to your local macros directory. If you save the file with a “.init” extension it will read automatically when you initiate QuickView. See Hot Keys in Chapter 14, “System Operations” for more information on hot keys.

October 2013 193 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 194: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualSave and Restore Operations

Saving and Restoring System Parameters

QuickView allows you to capture many of the system and data format settings to a system parameters that can be automatically read when QuickView starts.

The save operation is performed through the Save button which can be found near the bottom of the System Parameters menu. You can open this menu from the Main Drawing window through the Parameters pull-down.

If desired, you can save the following settings:

■ The Save button allows you to save the setting in the System Parameters form.

You can also save color system definitions separately. See Saving and Restoring Hot Keys earlier in this chapter.

The file that is saved is named system.prefs and is located in the $home/.cds_quickview directory. The Preferences File text field allows you to provide a name and directory location for the macro to be written when you click the Capture button. There are various ways to restore the values which you have saved.

Saving and Restoring MEBES Parameters

QuickView allows you to capture current values from the four MEBES Parameters menus. The saved values can be explicitly restored at any time or can be automatically restored when MEBES processing begins.

■ Save Option Values on the Parameters->MEBES pull-down of the Main Drawing window saves current option values from all four menus to a file k2mv.values in your current working directory. You can move, copy or rename this file but you should not edit it.

■ Restore Opt Values on the Parameters->MEBES pull-down restores option values to all four menus from a file k2mv.values in your current working directory.

■ Restore Opt Values ... on the Parameters->MEBES pull-down opens a file selection menu. When you select a file, the values are restored from that file to all four menus.

When you invoke QuickView and MEBES processing begins, it automatically restores values to all four MEBES Parameters menus from a file which you pre-select by setting the environment variable K2_MEBES_VALUES or from a file k2mv.values in your current working directory.

October 2013 194 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 195: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualSave and Restore Operations

Saving and Replaying Command Sequences

QuickView allows you to capture sequences of commands as you operate the viewer. The commands can preserved in a macro file which you can read (replay) later.

In general, you can use the macro capability to reproduce any desired QuickView behavior or state.

Instruction on using macros is provided in Chapter 14, “System Operations.”

Restoring Draw Attributes

When you select a pattern, job deck or layout database file for viewing, the Data Palette color, drawn, visible and text attributes which are initially assigned to it are automatically saved.

You can restore the initial values as desired.

■ Reset on the Data Palette restores initial attribute values to any Data Palette draw list non-header lines which you have highlighted.

■ All Reset on the Data Palette restores initial attribute values to all Data Palette draw list non-header lines for any file which has at least one highlighted non-header line.

October 2013 195 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 196: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualSave and Restore Operations

October 2013 196 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 197: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

14System Operations

In its standard configuration, QuickView is a powerful and versatile viewing tool.

By providing access to its executive system, QuickView allows you great flexibility to customize and extend the standard configuration to meet your viewing and data analysis needs.

You can access the executive system through menus, keyboard commands and macros. You can also query the executive system and monitor its operation.

A full explanation of the executive system is beyond the scope of this manual. This chapter serves as an introduction.

The Command Prompt

The Command prompt provides command line access to the executive system and supports the reading and writing of macros. The Command Prompt can be accessed by MR on the toolbar area of the Main Window and selecting Cmd Prompt.

Figure 14-1 Windows And Toolbars Context Menu

October 2013 197 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 198: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualSystem Operations

Figure 14-2 Command Prompt Toolbar

The Command Prompt has four parts; the entry field, the # button, the ? button and the M button.

The entry field allows you to enter QUEL commands.

The pound or number sign (#) button provides a Paste String feature. If you highlight a string in any window on the screen and press this paste button, the highlighted string will be inserted into the QUEL command prompt line/field and executed. This saves you some typing and ensures that you execute exactly the command you want.

The question mark (?) button provides a Query expression feature. Highlight an expression (typically a symbol) in the Command window then click the query button. The expression is evaluated and the results are displayed in the Info and Errors window.

The Macro button (M) allows you to record macros. A QuickView macro is a list of one or more commands which the QuickView executive system can read and execute to perform various functions. Macros are usually stored as files.

QuickView macros are written in a macro language (QUEL™) which is unique to QuickView. If you are familiar with the c++ programming language, you may detect some similarities. There is a QUEL Language User’s Guide for those who want more information about

Follow these steps to record a macro.

■ Bring QuickView to the point where the behavior of interest is about to begin.

■ Press ‘M’ on the right hand side of the Command Prompt and provide a macro file name.

■ Operate QuickView through the behavior that you wish to capture.

■ Press the ‘M’ again on the right hand side of the Command Prompt.

You can then load the macro by choosing Read Macro from the File menu. You will need to Browse to the location of the macro and then click Open.

The Command Window

The Command window provides command line access to the executive system. It also allows you to query and monitor the executive system.

October 2013 198 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 199: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualSystem Operations

Figure 14-3 Command Window

You can open the Command window through the View pull-down of the Main Drawing window.

The display area of the Command window provides a history of recently executed commands.

The Command window has five options on the context menu (MR in the display area):

■ Find - allows you to search the command window display area for a string.

■ # - The pound or number sign (#) button provides a Paste String feature. If you highlight a string in any window on the screen and press this paste button, the highlighted string will be inserted into the QUEL command prompt line/field and executed. This saves you some typing and ensures that you execute exactly the command you want.

■ Clear - clears the display area.

■ Save As - allows you to save the contents of the display area in the Command window.

■ Font - allows you to change the font that appears in the display area.

The command line is located near the bottom of the Command window.

■ You can enter commands on the command line from the keyboard or copy them from the command history by selecting them with ML.

■ After you enter a command, edit it if desired and execute it by pressing Enter.

Note: If the Command window is docked to the Main Drawing Window, the Command Prompt and buttons will not appear. If using this window docked, refer to the Command Prompt section above.

There are also two buttons located next to the command prompt, the # and ? buttons.

October 2013 199 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 200: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualSystem Operations

■ The pound or number sign (#) button provides a Paste String feature. If you highlight a string in any window on the screen and press this paste button, the highlighted string will be inserted into the QUEL command prompt line/field and executed. This saves you some typing and ensures that you execute exactly the command you want.

■ The question mark (?) button provides a Query expression feature. Highlight an expression (typically a symbol) in the Command window then click the query button. The expression is evaluated and the results are displayed in the Info and Errors window.

QuickView Macros

A QuickView macro is a list of one or more commands which the QuickView executive system can read and execute to perform various functions. Macros are usually stored as files.

QuickView macros are written in a macro language (QUEL™) which is unique to QuickView. If you are familiar with the c++ programming language, you may detect some similarities. There is a QUEL Language User’s Guide for those who want more information about QuickView’s macro language. Appendix E, “Macro Reference,” contains a list of the macros which are distributed with QuickView.

Reading a Macro

Macros can be read from the Main Drawing window.

1. Press Read Macro on the File pull-down of the Main Drawing window.

A Macros menu appears which lists all files in the macros directory which have a .mac extension.

2. When the menu appears, you can select a macro with ML and read it by pressing Read.

3. If the macro that you intend to read is not in the macro directory or if its name does not end in a .mac extension, you can press Browse to open a file finder menu. You can use the file finder to find and select the desired macro.

You can also type the macro command into the Command Prompt and press the enter. This can be done one command at a time if appropriate.

Recording a Macro

The Macro button (M) on the Command Prompt allows you to record macros.

October 2013 200 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 201: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualSystem Operations

Follow these steps to record a macro.

■ Bring QuickView to the point where the behavior of interest is about to begin.

■ Press ‘M’ on the right hand side of the Command Prompt and provide a macro file name.

■ Operate QuickView through the behavior that you wish to capture.

■ Press the ‘M’ again on the right hand side of the Command Prompt.

You can then load the macro by choosing Read Macro from the File menu. You will need to Browse to the location of the macro and then click Open.

Debugging Macros

Though this module does not go into writing custom QUEL™ macros, there are some features in the viewer that are useful to know for debugging simple macros.

You can test commands you think you want to put into macros by typing them in the Command window’s command entry field. You are required to type the command manually.

At the bottom right of the window you can see two buttons that make this process even simpler. The pound or number sign (#) button provides a Paste String feature. If you highlight a string in any window on the screen and press this paste button, the highlighted string will be inserted into the QUEL command prompt line/field and executed. This saves you some typing and ensures that you execute exactly the command you want.

The question mark (?) button provides a Query expression feature. Highlight an expression (typically a symbol) in the Command window then click the query button. The expression is evaluated and the results are displayed in the Info and Errors window.

The Info and Errors Window

The Info and Errors window serves QuickView as a common text area for displaying detailed information and detailed errors for QuickView when applicable.

October 2013 201 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 202: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualSystem Operations

Figure 14-4 Information And Errors Window

You can open the Info and Errors window through the View pull-down of the Main Drawing window.

The display area of the Info and Errors window provides a detailed log of results from the commands run in the Main Drawing window (i.e. measurement information).

The Info and Errors window has ten options on the initial context menu (MR in the display area):

■ Find - allows you to search the command window display area for a string.

■ Select All - selects all of the data in the display area.

■ Copy - Copies the selected data to the system clipboard.

■ Clear - clears the display area.

■ Font - allows you to change the font that appears in the display area.

■ Save As - allows you to save the contents of the display area.

■ Wrap Text - Toggles text wrapping in the display area.

■ Max Debug - Toggles max debugging to help track down issues with QuickView.

October 2013 202 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 203: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualSystem Operations

Journaling - allows you to a journal file named ./k2_viewer.jou. Journal files are a macro of everything executed in the viewer. They also contain a transcription of input and output to assist in the debugging of the tool. The journal command may be issued at any time, and the journal will be recorded until you press the Journal On/Off toggle again. You may also create a journal by entering the command “journal(<file_name>);” in the command window. Creating the journal in this way allows you to decide the name of the journal.

■ QUEL - This menu has 9 options that are used for developing in QUEL:

❑ Memory - The memory command will post the QUEL node memory usage in the Info and Errors window.

❑ Commands - Prints the QUEL commands to the Info and Errors window.

❑ Objects - Prints the QUEL objects to the Info and Errors window.

❑ Tokens - Prints the QUEL tokens to the Info and Errors window.

❑ Symbols - Prints the QUEL symbols to the Info and Errors window.

❑ Symbol Scopes - Prints the QUEL scopes for the symbols to the Info and Errors window.

❑ Reversed Symbols - Prints the QUEL reversed symbols to the Info and Errors window.

❑ Symbol List - Prints the QUEL lists to the Info and Errors window.

❑ Functions - Prints the QUEL functions to the Info and Errors window.

Note: For more information, see the QUEL Language Users Guide on SourceLink.

The command line is located near the bottom of the Info and Errors window.

■ You can enter commands on the command line from the keyboard or copy them from the command history by selecting them with ML.

■ After you enter a command, edit it if desired and execute it by pressing Enter.

Note: If the Info and Errors window is docked to the Main Drawing Window, the Command Prompt and buttons will not appear. If using this window docked, refer to the Command Prompt section above.

There are also two buttons located next to the command prompt, the # and ? buttons.

■ The pound or number sign (#) button provides a Paste String feature. If you highlight a string in any window on the screen and press this paste button, the highlighted string will be inserted into the QUEL command prompt line/field and executed. This saves you some typing and ensures that you execute exactly the command you want.

October 2013 203 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 204: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualSystem Operations

■ The question mark (?) button provides a Query expression feature. Highlight an expression (typically a symbol) in the Command window then click the query button. The expression is evaluated and the results are displayed in the Info and Errors window.

Journal Files

You can create a journal file named ./k2_viewer.jou by pressing the Journal button on the context menu of the Info and Errors window. Journal files are a macro of everything executed in the viewer. They also contain a transcription of input and output to assist in the debugging of the tool. The journal command may be issued at any time, and the journal will be recorded until you press the Journal On/Off toggle again. You may also create a journal by entering the command “journal(<file_name>);” in the command window. Creating the journal in this way allows you to decide the name of the journal.

QUEL Utilities

Most of the items listed under the QUEL context menu in the Info and Errors window. There is a QUEL Language User’s Guide for those who want more information about QuickView’s macro language. The replay macro can also be used for debugging QUEL.

Hot Keys

QuickView commands are most often invoked through the mouse. As an alternative, the system allows you to invoke commands through default hot keys or through hot keys which you define. Default hot keys are automatically available when the viewer is started.

Some hot keys are sensitive to the position of the cursor. They act on the coordinates in the Main Drawing window.

Many hot keys require only that the cursor be in the Main Drawing window when you press the designated key.

Other hot keys require modifiers like <shift>. For instance, the default hot key <shift> F Fits the Context window.

For a list of default hot keys and their relationship to menu/mouse operations, see Appendix B, “Hot Key Reference.”

You can view the list of current hot keys in the Hot Keys window. You can also execute some hot keys from that window if you wish.

October 2013 204 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 205: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualSystem Operations

1. Press Read Macro on the File pull-down of the Main Drawing window and read the macro hot_keys to open the Hot Keys window. The hot key <shift> H also opens this window.

2. The Hot Keys window displays a list of currently defined hot keys arranged alphabetically by tags. Certain hot keys which are defined without tags do not appear in the list.

3. You can invoke hot keys by selecting them from the list with ML and clicking the # button.

Note: Hot keys which require specific cursor input cannot be activated in this manner. Such hot keys ordinarily have the word KEY (i.e. key operation only) as part of their tag.

You can define hot keys or alter or delete hot keys through the Hot Key Utility window:

Figure 14-5 Hot Key Utility

1. Press Read Macro on the File pull-down of the Main Drawing window and read the macro hot_key_utility to open the Hot Key Utility window.

2. The lower portion of the window displays a list of current hot keys. The display is similar to the display in the Hot Keys window except that the hot keys are sorted by key designations rather than by tags.

3. The Save Help button at the bottom of the window sorts the list by tag and writes it to a file k2_hot_key.help in your current working directory.

The Hot Key Utility Form

October 2013 205 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 206: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualSystem Operations

4. The Update button near the center of the window updates the list. As you make changes, the list is not updated until you press Update.

5. The three text fields and four toggles in the upper part of the window allow you to view, input or change the elements of a hot key definition.

a. The Key text field and the four toggles just below it identify a key.

b. The Tag text field provides a label or tag which identifies the function of the key. You can use any text of reasonable length which helps you remember the function of the key.

c. The Cmd (Command) text field defines the command or commands which the key invokes. The command must conform to macro language format.

d. You can use the Clear key at any time to blank out all three text fields and to turn all four toggles off.

6. The Delete button deletes the selected hot key.

7. You can use the Apply button to define a new hot key or to modify an existing hot key.

8. If you add, delete or modify hot keys and you wish the changes to persist into future QuickView sessions, use the Save Keys button to save the hotkeys to your local macros directory. If you save the file with a “.init” extension it will read automatically when you initiate QuickView.

Create or Modify a Hot Key

1. Set the three text fields and the four toggles on the Hot Key Utility window to select a key and to provide a tag and a command.

You can obtain values from a current hot key definition by selecting an appropriate line in the list of hot keys.

You can copy commands from the history display of the Command window (see The Command Window earlier in this chapter) and paste them in the Cmd field if you wish.

You can enter or modify values manually as appropriate.

2. If you wish to test the intended command, copy and paste it to the command line of the Command window and press the OK button. If there is a problem, there will be a report of a syntax error or the intended behavior will not occur.

3. Press Apply to add the new hot key or to modify the existing hot key.

4. Press Update to update the list of hot keys.

October 2013 206 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 207: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualSystem Operations

Delete a current hot key

1. Set the Key text field and the four toggles on the Hot Key Utility window to identify the hot key which is to be deleted. You can do this either manually or by selecting an appropriate line in the list of hot keys with ML. For the delete operation, it does not matter if anything is displayed in the Tag and Cmd fields.

2. Press Delete to delete the hot key.

3. Press Update to update the list of hot keys.

October 2013 207 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 208: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualSystem Operations

October 2013 208 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 209: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

15Editing GDSII Data

This chapter describes the features of the QuickView GDSII geometry editor.

Getting Started

Enabling The QuickView Editing Features

By default the geometry manipulation features in QuickView are disable in order to preserve QuickView’s legacy as a view only environment.

In order to enable QuickView’s editing features the user has two options:

❑ Pass the ‘-edit’ option to k2_viewer when QuickView is invoked.

$K2_VIEWER_HOME/bin/k2_viewer -edit

❑ Set the K2_EDITOR environment variable to any value before invoking QuickView.

Important

The editing state of a QuickView session cannot be changed after Quickview is invoked.

Starting The Editor

When QuickView is invoked with its editing features enabled the “Start Editor” option will be available under the Tools pulldown menu in the Main Window.

October 2013 209 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 210: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Figure 15-1 Tools Menu “Start Editor” Option

The “Start Editor” option will load the editor features and display the Edit Toolbar.

Figure 15-2 Edit Toolbar

October 2013 210 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 211: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Editing Data

After the editing features are loaded into QuickView and the Edit Toolbar is available QuickView users may begin manipulating geometries in the current GDSII database.

Specifying The Database To Edit

QuickView has the ability to simultaneously load and work with multiple geometrical data files. This paradigm is maintained for the editing features as well. While multiple GDSII databases may be edited in a single QuickView session, edits may only be made and applied to the current GDSII database or library.

Specifying The Current Database

In any given QuickView session the idea of a current data database has two levels of hierarchy.

The Current Focus Database

At the top level QuickView has a single the Current Database, meaning the database that has the focus for the current Quickview session. The Current Database is signified by the highlighted database in the Active DBs toolbar located at the bottom of the Main Window.

The Current Database may be changed in one of several ways:

❑ Selecting an alternative DB in the Active DBs toolbar.

❑ Selection an alternative DB in the Main Drawing Area context menu.

❑ Clicking on a DB header in the Data Palette.

❑ Selecting a DB or one of its child nodes in the Data Browser.

❑ Selecting a DB in the “Current Library” section in any one of the various parameters windows.

Figure 15-3 Active DBs Toolbar

October 2013 211 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 212: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

The Current <Format> Database

At a lower level there QuickView maintains a Current <Format> Databases or Libraries for each active format. The last currently loaded database or library for each active format that was set to the Current Focus Database will be maintained by QuickView as the Current <Format> Database. With respect to the QuickView editor the Current GDSII Library is used as the current editing database. Setting the Current GDSII Library is done by setting the desired GDSII DB to the Current Focus Database using one of the methods outlined above.

Caution

If a user would like to edit multiple GDSII databases in the same QuickView session they need to be mindful of the Current GDSII Library in order to ensure that any edits are being applied to the correct Data File.

Edit In Place

Manipulations made to a geometry are applied directly to the cell where they are drawn. This modifies the cell definition and the modification are automatically applied to every instance of the modified cell in the GDSII library. An example of this is illustrated in Figure 15-4 where deleting a single geometry in the current top cell results in that geometry being removed from every instance of the cell where it is drawn.

October 2013 212 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 213: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Figure 15-4 Edit In Place

Select

With the Current GDSII Library set to the targeted GDSII database for subsequent geometry modification, the user begins editing by selecting the geometry they wish to modify.

Geometry selection is initiated by clicking on the select icon in the Edit Toolbar or with the Shift-S hotkey.

When geometry selection is initiated the user is prompted to select the targeted geometry using appropriate mouse button based on the users current buttons and keys preferences (Default - Middle Mouse MM).

Tip

Geometry selection is edge based. In order to ensure the selection of the targeted geometry click near one of the edges of the targeted geometry.

Important

As noted in later sections of this chapter, selection will happen automatically for a given operation if there is no currently selected geometry.

October 2013 213 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 214: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Figure 15-5 Selecting A Geometry For Edit

Unselect

A geometry is unselected by clicking on the unselect icon in the Edit Toolbar or pressing the Escape hot key.

Important

Any selected geometries will automatically be unselected when the current GDSII library is changed.

Delete

A selected geometry will be deleted by clicking on the delete icon in the Edit Toolbar or pressing the Delete hot key. If a there are no selected geometries the user will be prompted to select the geometry to delete. In this case the geometry will automatically be selected and deleted in a single action. When combined with the loop feature this behavior allows the user to rapidly delete a series of geometries.

October 2013 214 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 215: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Tip

When Loop mode is enabled the previous edit operation will automatically be initiated after it is completed. This allows a user to rapidly repeat an operation without having to manually initiate it through the Edit Toolbar or associated hot key. Loop mode is enable by clicking the loop icon in the Measure Toolbar.

Move

A selected geometry may be moved by clicking on the move icon in the Edit Toolbar.

Handle Selection

After clicking the move icon the user will be prompted to select a move handle. A handle is defined as the turn point that the mouse pointer will be attached to while the geometry is being moved. Additionally when the geometry is finally placed the handle is aligned to the placement location. If a there are no selected geometries the user will be prompted to select the geometry to move. When the move geometry is selected the move handle will be automatically chosen based on the cursor position when the geometry was selected.

Figure 15-6 Move Geometry Handle Selection

October 2013 215 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 216: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Move Constraints

After a move handle is selected a geometry highlight will be attached to motion of the mouse pointer in the drawing window. The location of the highlight as the mouse pointer moves in the drawing window indicates where the selected geometry may be placed. The motion of the geometry highlight is constrained by the current constraint mode. A constraint mode defines how the selected object will be placed based on the specified placement coordinate. The default constraint for the move operation is defined by current point measure constraint value specified in the system parameters window.

Tip

The current move constraining can be modified during a move operation using the ‘a’, ‘x’, and ‘y’ hotkeys.

Table 15-1 Move Constraint Modes

Name Abbreviation Description Example

Any Any The handle is directly attached to the mouse pointer and the final placement position directly correlates to the specified placement coordinates

Orthogonal Orth The handle can only move vertically or horizontally from its original location and the final placement position will correlate with the perpendicular intersection of the placement coordinates.

Octagonal Oct The handle can only move vertically, horizontally, or diagonally from its original location and the final placement position will correlate with the perpendicular intersection of the placement coordinates.

October 2013 216 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 217: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Placement

The geometry is finally placed when an offset point is selected. The combination of the selected placement coordinates and the constraint mode will determine the final placement location. In general placement coordinates are chosen using the appropriate mouse button for selecting the current cursor location depending on the current button and key parameters (Default - Middle Mouse MM). Additionally the placement coordinates may be chosen using the ‘e’, ‘v’, ‘h’, ‘c’, ‘i’, and ‘n’ hot keys.

Octagonal Interpolated

OctI The handle can only move vertically, horizontally, or diagonally from its original location. The final placement position will correlate with internal axis of the placement coordinates.

Octagonal Extrapolated

OctE The handle can only move vertically, horizontally, or diagonally from its original location. The final placement position will correlate with external axis of the placement coordinates.

Horizontal Horz The handle can only move horizontally from its original location and the final placement position will correlate with the perpendicular intersection of the placement coordinates.

Vertical Vert The handle can only move vertically from its original location and the final placement position will correlate with the perpendicular intersection of the placement coordinates.

Table 15-1 Move Constraint Modes

Name Abbreviation Description Example

October 2013 217 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 218: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Figure 15-7 Move Geometry Placement

Hotkeys

The following table outlines the available hotkeys for the move operation.

Table 15-2 Move Geometry Hotkeys

Hotkey Description

a Change current move constraint mode

c Select the nearest corner for placement coordinates

e Select the center of the nearest edge for placement coordinates

h Select the center of the nearest horizontal edge for placement coordinates

i Select the nearest intersection for placement coordinates

n Select the center of the nearest geometry for placement coordinates

v Select the center of the nearest vertical edge for placement coordinates

x Set the current move constraint to Horizontal

y Set the current move constraint to Vertical

October 2013 218 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 219: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Copy

A selected geometry may be copied by clicking on the copy icon in the Edit Toolbar. When a user initiates a copy of an already selected geometry they are automatically placed into a move operation with the copied geometry’s origin selected as the move handle.

If a there are no selected geometries when a copy operation is initiated the user will be prompted to select the geometry to copy. In this case the geometry will automatically be selected and copied. The user will then be automatically placed in a move operation for the copied geometry. In this case the handle is chosen based on the cursor location when the user selected the shape to copy.

Important

If the user cancels the move operation the copied shape is deleted and the user is put back into the state where they were before the copy operation was initiated.

Figure 15-8 Copy Geometry

Escape Cancel move operation

Table 15-2 Move Geometry Hotkeys

Hotkey Description

October 2013 219 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 220: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Split

A selected geometry may be split by clicking on the split icon in the Edit Toolbar. When a split is initiated the user is prompted for the starting point for the split or cut line. After the starting point is selected the user will be prompted to select the end point for the split line. After the split line is determined the selected geometry will be divided into two or more shapes depending on the number of times the specified split line completely crosses the selected geometry. In general the split line start and end points are chosen using the appropriate mouse button for selecting the current cursor location depending on the current button and key parameters (Default - Middle Mouse MM). Additionally the start and end points may be chosen using the ‘e’, ‘v’, ‘h’, ‘c’, ‘i’, and ‘n’ hot keys.

If a there are no selected geometries when a split operation is initiated the user will be prompted to select the geometry to split. In this case the geometry will automatically be selected and the cursor position used to select the geometry will be automatically assigned to the start point of the split line.

Figure 15-9 Split Geometry

October 2013 220 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 221: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Caution

The split operation is designed for simple cases and there several know split lines that will result in an error indicating that the geometry could not be split. The best way to avoid these occurrences is to make sure that the start and end points of the specified split lines are clearly outside of the selected geometry.

Table 15-3 Split Geometry Hotkeys

Stretch

A selected geometry may be stretched by clicking on the stretch icon in the Edit Toolbar. When a stretch is initiated the user is prompted to select the geometry edge that will be moved. After the edge is selected the user will be prompted to select the new position of the selected edge. In general the stretch edge selection and placement is done using the appropriate mouse button for selecting the current cursor location depending on the current button and key parameters (Default - Middle Mouse MM). Additionally the stretch edge selection and placement may be specified using the ‘e’, ‘v’, ‘h’, ‘c’, ‘i’, and ‘n’ hot keys.

If a there are no selected geometries when a stretch operation is initiated the user will be prompted to select the geometry to stretch. In this case the geometry will automatically be selected and the cursor position used to select the geometry will be used to specify the selection of the stretch edge.

Hotkey Description

a Change current move constraint mode

c Select the nearest corner for start and end point selection

e Select the center of the nearest edge for start and end point selection

h Select the center of the nearest horizontal edge for start and end point selection

i Select the nearest intersection for start and end point selection

n Select the center of the nearest geometry for start and end point selection

u Undo start point selection

v Select the center of the nearest vertical edge for start and end point selection

x Set the current move constraint to Horizontal

y Set the current move constraint to Vertical

Escape Cancel split operation

October 2013 221 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 222: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Figure 15-10 Stretch Geometry

Table 15-4 Stretch Geometry Hotkeys

Hotkey Description

a Change current move constraint mode

c Select the nearest corner for edge selection and placement coordinates

e Select the center of the nearest edge for edge selection and placement coordinates

h Select the center of the nearest horizontal edge for edge selection and placement coordinates

i Select the nearest intersection for edge selection and placement coordinates

n Select the center of the nearest geometry for edge selection and placement coordinates

v Select the center of the nearest vertical edge for edge selection and placement coordinates

x Set the current move constraint to Horizontal

y Set the current move constraint to Vertical

Escape Cancel stretch operation

October 2013 222 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 223: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Flatten Hierarchy

The flatten hierarchy icon will display the flatten hierarchy tool which will show the cell hierarchy for the current selected shape.

Figure 15-11 Flatten Hierarchy Tool

Selecting a cell in the list and clicking on the Flatten Cell Hierarchy icon at the top of the window will replace the associated cell reference in its parent cell with the shapes the selected cell represents removing the associated hierarchy.

Selecting different cells in the hierarchy list will highlight the cell boundary of the associated cell in the drawing window in order to more easily visualize the extent of the cell flattening operation if the cell were flattened.

Caution

Flattening a cell will clear the current edit undo history and this operation cannot be undone.

New Polygon

A new polygon may be added by clicking on the new polygon icon in the Edit Toolbar. When the new polygon mode is initiated the user is prompted to begin selecting the turn points for the new polygon. In general the turn point selection is done using the appropriate mouse button for selecting the current cursor location depending on the current button and key parameters (Default - Middle Mouse MM). Additionally turn point selection and placement may be specified using the ‘e’, ‘v’, ‘h’, ‘c’, ‘i’, ‘n’ and ‘p’ hot keys.

October 2013 223 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 224: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

The polygon definition is finished and the new polygon is created by selecting the original turn point or by clicking the appropriate mouse button for ending an operation (Default - Right Mouse MR).

The default layer for a new polygon is the first numerical layer found in the current GDSII library. The new polygon layer may be modified using the New Path.

Important

New polygons may only be created on layers that already exist in the current GDSII library.

Figure 15-12 New Polygon

Table 15-5 New Polygon Hotkeys

Hotkey Description

a Change current move constraint mode

c Select the nearest corner for turn point selection

e Select the center of the nearest edge for turn point selection

h Select the center of the nearest horizontal edge for turn point selections

i Select the nearest intersection for turn point selection

October 2013 224 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 225: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

New Path

A new path may be added by clicking on the new path icon in the Edit Toolbar. When the new path mode is initiated the user is prompted to begin selecting the turn points for the new path. In general the turn point selection is done using the appropriate mouse button for selecting the current cursor location depending on the current button and key parameters (Default - Middle Mouse MM). Additionally turn point selection and placement may be specified using the ‘e’, ‘v’, ‘h’, ‘c’, ‘i’, ‘n’ and ‘p’ hot keys.

The path definition is finished and the new path is created by clicking the appropriate mouse button for ending an operation (Default - Right Mouse MR).

The default layer for a new path is the first numerical layer found in the current GDSII library. Additionally the default path width is 1 with a truncated end type. The new path layer, width and end type attributes may be modified using the New Path.

Important

New paths may only be created on layers that already exist in the current GDSII library.

n Select the center of the nearest geometry for turn point selection

p Select the nearest turn point in the new polygon for new turn point selection

u Undo previous turn point selection

v Select the center of the nearest vertical edge for turn point selection

x Set the current move constraint to Horizontal

y Set the current move constraint to Vertical

Escape Cancel new polygon operation

Hotkey Description

October 2013 225 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 226: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Figure 15-13 New Path

Table 15-6 New Path Hotkeys

Hotkey Description

a Change current move constraint mode

c Select the nearest corner for turn point selection

e Select the center of the nearest edge for turn point selection

h Select the center of the nearest horizontal edge for turn point selections

i Select the nearest intersection for turn point selection

n Select the center of the nearest geometry for turn point selection

p Select the nearest turn point in the new path for new turn point selection

u Undo previous turn point selection

v Select the center of the nearest vertical edge for turn point selection

x Set the current move constraint to Horizontal

y Set the current move constraint to Vertical

Escape Cancel new polygon operation

October 2013 226 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 227: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Properties Editor

In addition to the interactive tools available for manipulating geometries QuickView includes a geometry properties editor. The properties editor provides direct access to the properties or attributes of the selected geometry for modification. The content of the properties editor will verify depending on the type of selected geometry.

Figure 15-14 Geometry Properties Editor

Regardless of the geometry type the user is presented with the OK, Cancel, and Apply buttons.

Important

Attribute modifications are not applied to the actual data until the user clicks the OK or Apply button.

OK Apply attribute modifications and close the properties editor

Cancel Ignore any attribute modifications and close the properties editor

Apply Apply attribute modifications

October 2013 227 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 228: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Polygon Properties Editor

When the selected geometry is a polygon the user is presented with the polygon properties editor.

At the top of the polygon properties editor the user may modify the layer and data type for the selected polygon.

Important

Currently a polygon may only be moved to a layer and/or data type that already exists in the current GDSII library. QuickView is not currently able to create a new GDSII layer and/or data type.

The polygon properties editor also provides three tools for working with the polygon turn points.

List

The polygon properties editor list allows the user to directly edit the turn points as a list of coordinates.

Figure 15-15 Polygon Properties Editor - List

October 2013 228 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 229: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Edit Polygon Point List

On the right side of the list editor the user is presented with a text area that displays the current polygon turn points as a series of coordinate values in the form x1, y1, x2, y2, ... xN, yN. The user may edit the list of coordinate in any way they wish as long as this format is maintained. The polygon properties editor will ignore the placement of comas and parenthesis, as it only considers the coordinate values. If the polygon information provided does not define a closed polygon the first coordinate pair will automatically be appended to the end of the coordinate list.

If an issue is encountered a message preceded by a pair of forward slash characters ‘//’ will be printed in the polygon point list text area. The ‘//’ characters are interpreted as comments and any values following them on the same line are ignored. They do not need to be removed when making a correction to the coordinate list. Just update the coordinates and click the Refresh button at the bottom of the properties editor.

The following examples illustrate several different ways that turn point values may be entered.

Example 15-1 (0,0)(1,0)(1,1)(0,1)(0,0)

Example 15-2 (0,0 1,0)(1,1 0,1)

Example 15-3 0,0 1,01,10,10,0

Offset Polygon

The offset polygon tool on the left side of the list editor provides a mechanism that allows the user to apply an offset to the coordinates in the turn point list. Clicking the Apply Offset button will add the entered X and Y offset values to each X and Y coordinate value in the turn point list respectively shifting the entire polygon by the specified amount.

October 2013 229 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 230: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Edge By Edge

The polygon properties editor allows the user to directly edit turn points in the context of a polygon edge.

Figure 15-16 Polygon Properties Editor - Edge By Edge

Edit Polygon Edge

On the right side of the edge by edge editor the user can step from edge to edge in the selected polygon and modify the corresponding end points using the First, Next, Previous, and Last buttons. As the user steps from one edge to the next the current edge is highlighted in the drawing window indicating which edge the current X1, Y1, X2, and Y2 values correspond to.

Offset Edge

The offset edge tool on the left side of the edge by edge editor provides a mechanism that allows the user to apply an offset to the current edge coordinates. Clicking the Apply Offset button will add the entered X and Y offset values to each X and Y edge coordinate value respectively shifting the edge by the specified amount.

October 2013 230 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 231: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Select

The select tool allows the user to go directly to a specific polygon edge by selecting it in the drawing window. Clicking the Select button will prompt the user to select the edge in the selected polygon. Selecting an edge in the drawing window will automatically step the edge by edge editor to the selected edge.

Point By point

The polygon properties editor allows the user to directly edit the turn points in the context of a single polygon turn point.

Figure 15-17 Polygon Properties Editor - Point By Point

Edit Polygon Point

On the right side of the point by point editor the user can step from point to point in the selected polygon and modify the corresponding coordinates using the First, Next, Previous, and Last buttons. As the user steps from one point to the next the current point is highlighted in the drawing window indicating which point the current X, and Y values correspond to.

October 2013 231 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 232: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Offset Point

The offset point tool on the left side of the point by point editor provides a mechanism that allows the user to apply an offset to the current point coordinates. Clicking the Apply Offset button will add the entered X and Y offset values to each X and Y point coordinate value respectively shifting the point by the specified amount.

Select

The select tool allows the user to go directly to a specific polygon point by selecting it in the drawing window. Clicking the Select button will prompt the user to select a turn point in the selected polygon. Selecting a turn point in the drawing window will automatically step the point by point editor to the selected point.

Copy

The copy tool will copy the current turn point and insert it in the turn point list immediately after the copied turn point in the turn point list. After the turn point is copied the new turn point is automatically selected.

Delete

The delete tool will delete the current turn point and automatically select the previous turn point in the turn point list.

Refresh

The refresh button will refresh the current highlight in the drawing window. This button allows the user to visualize any attribute manipulations that are not automatically highlighted in the drawing window.

Revert

The Revert button allows the user to revert the polygon turn points list to the state of the previous applied edit or polygon selection.

Important

Attribute modifications are not applied to the actual data until the user clicks the Apply or OK button in the properties editor.

October 2013 232 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 233: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Path Properties Editor

When the selected geometry is a path the user is presented with the path properties editor.

At the top of the path properties editor the user may modify the layer and data type for the selected path.

Important

Currently a path may only be moved to a layer and/or data type that already exists in the current GDSII library. QuickView is not currently able to create a new GDSII layer and/or data type.

The path properties editor also provides three tools for working with the path end and turn points.

Path

The path properties editor Path tool allows the user to directly edit the end and turn points as a list of coordinates.

Figure 15-18 Path Properties Editor - Path

October 2013 233 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 234: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Turn Points

On the right side of the list editor the user is presented with a text area that displays the current path turn points as a series of coordinate values in the form x1, y1, x2, y2, ... xN, yN. The user may edit the list of coordinates in any way they wish as long as this format is maintained. The path properties editor will ignore the placement of comas and parenthesis, as it only considers the number of coordinate values.

If an issue is encountered a message preceded by a pair of forward slash characters ‘//’ will be printed in the polygon point list text area. The ‘//’ characters are interpreted as comments and any values following them on the same line are ignored.

The following examples illustrate several different ways that turn point values may be entered.

Example 15-4 (0,0)(1,0)(1,1)(2,1)

Example 15-5 0,0 1,01,12,1

Width

The width value allows the user to modify the width of the current selected path.

End Type

The end type value allows the user to modify the end type of the current selected path.

October 2013 234 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 235: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Begin & End Extensions

The begin and end extensions are only applied if the path end type is “Variable”. The begin and end points are identified in the drawing window by a circle and an arrow respectively in the selected path highlight.

Offset Path

The offset path tool on the left side of the path editor provides a mechanism that allows the user to apply an offset to the coordinates in the turn points list. Clicking the Apply Offset button will add the entered X and Y offset values to each X and Y coordinate value in the turn points list respectively shifting the entire path by the specified amount.

Segment By Segment

The path properties editor allows the user to directly edit the turn points in the context of a path segment.

Table 15-7

End Type Description

Truncated The path will be truncated at the position of the begin and end coordinates.

Extended The path will extend beyond the begin and end coordinates by an amount equal to the current path width.

Rounded The path will be extended beyond the begin and end coordinates by a radius equal to the current path width

Variable The path will be extended beyond the begin and end coordinates by the amounts specified by the begin and end extensions respectively.

October 2013 235 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 236: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Figure 15-19 Path Properties Editor - Segment By Segment

Edit Path Segment

On the right side of the segment by segment editor the user can step from segment to segment in the selected path and modify the corresponding end points using the First, Next, Previous, and Last buttons. As the user steps from one segment to the next the current segment is highlighted in the drawing window indicating which segment the current X1, Y1, X2, and Y2 values correspond to.

Offset Segment

The offset segment tool on the left side of the segment by segment editor provides a mechanism that allows the user to apply an offset to the current segment coordinates. Clicking the Apply Offset button will add the entered X and Y offset values to each X and Y segment coordinate value respectively shifting the segment by the specified amount.

Select

The select tool allows the user to go directly to a specific path segment by selecting it in the drawing window. Clicking the Select button will prompt the user to select the segment in the selected path. Selecting a segment in the drawing window will automatically step the segment by segment editor to the selected segment.

October 2013 236 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 237: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Point By point

The path properties editor allows the user to directly edit the turn points in the context of a single path turn point.

Figure 15-20 Polygon Properties Editor - Point By Point

Edit Path Turn Point

On the right side of the point by point editor the user can step from point to point in the selected path and modify the corresponding coordinates using the First, Next, Previous, and Last buttons. As the user steps from one point to the next the current point is highlighted in the drawing window indicating which point the current X, and Y values correspond to.

Offset Point

The offset point tool on the left side of the point by point editor provides a mechanism that allows the user to apply an offset to the current point coordinates. Clicking the Apply Offset button will add the entered X and Y offset values to each X and Y point coordinate value respectively shifting the point by the specified amount.

October 2013 237 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 238: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEditing GDSII Data

Select

The select tool allows the user to go directly to a specific path point by selecting it in the drawing window. Clicking the Select button will prompt the user to select the point in the selected path. Selecting a point in the drawing window will automatically step the point by point editor to the selected point.

Copy

The copy tool will copy the current turn point and insert it in the turn point list immediately after the copied turn point. After the turn point is copied the new turn point is automatically selected.

Delete

The delete tool will delete the current turn point and automatically select the previous turn point in the turn point list.

Refresh

The refresh button will refresh the current highlight in the drawing window. This button allows the user to visualize any attribute manipulations that are not automatically highlighted in the drawing window.

Revert

The Revert button allows the user to revert the path turn points list to the state of the previous applied edits or path selection.

Important

Attribute modifications are not applied to the actual data until the user clicks the Apply or OK button in the properties editor.

October 2013 238 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 239: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

16MaskCompose Tool

The MaskCompose Tool provides a cockpit for working with MaskCompose output data. It allows you to:

■ Quickly open and review the most common output files.

■ Step through Frame and Reticle Item placements and Hot Spot locations.

Figure 16-1 MaskCompose Tool

October 2013 239 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 240: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualMaskCompose Tool

Starting The Tool

When QuickView starts up it will check the following conditions and if any one of them is true it will automatically add a MaskCompose icon to the general utilities toolbar at the top of the drawing window.

❑ The K2_MASKCOMPOSE_HOME environment variables is set.

❑ The WORKING_ROOT environment variables is set.

❑ The k2_mci executable is found in your execution path ($PATH).

If the MaskCompose icon is not available in the utilities toolbar then the tool can be accessed through the read macros dialog that is displayed by selecting Read Macros from the Main Drawing Window’s File menu.

Identifying The MaskCompose Project/Order

When the MaskCompose tools are started they will check both the WORKING_ROOT environment variable along with the current working directory (CWD) to automatically locate MaskCompose project directories. A project directory is identified if it contains both of the following files.

❑ <project_name>.mcretsum

❑ mcrg_files/<project_name>.rrs

The MaskCompose tools require that both of these files be present in a project directory in order for it to be valid.

If one or more projects are automatically identified when the tools startup one will be loaded automatically with the current working directory having the highest priority.

Selecting A Project

The Open option under the File menu will display the project selection dialog which will list all of the projects currently identified for the session. If the project you are looking for is not listed it can be added using the open project icon by browsing to and selecting the desired project directory.

October 2013 240 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 241: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualMaskCompose Tool

Output Files

When a MaskCompose project is selected it automatically searches for the most common MaskCompose output files. Any files that are identified in the specified project will be listed for convenient access. The listed files can be opened by double clicking on any individual item or by selecting a file and clicking the Open File icon.

Figure 16-2 MaskCompose Tool - Output Files

Output File Options

Clicking on the options icon will display the output file options.

October 2013 241 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 242: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualMaskCompose Tool

Figure 16-3 MaskCompose Tools - Output Files - Options

The PDF Viewer and Postscript Viewer options are used by the MaskCompose tools to correctly open PDF and Postscript files. The values entered into these fields will be translated directly to the command line to execute the specified document viewer. The <pdf_file> and <ps_file> tokens are used to indicate where in the command the PDF and Postscript file paths need to be inserted.

The save icon can be used to save the Output File options for future QuickView MaskCompose Tools sessions.

October 2013 242 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 243: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualMaskCompose Tool

Stepper

The Stepper tab provide access to the MaskCompose project database. The stepper is able to search for item and hot spot information and step to the results in the Main Drawing Window.

Figure 16-4 MaskCompose Tool - Stepper

Search

The search parameters are used to locate item and hot spot information in the MaskCompose project database. The following table identifies and describes the different search parameters and controls.

October 2013 243 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 244: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualMaskCompose Tool

Table 16-1

Parameter Description

Reference Item The reference item indicates the general search target. In MaskCompose this will be directly related to items with a Job Deck or Scribe Builder build method. From the perspective of QuickView it generally relates to the specific geometrical database file being viewed. The items that you may choose from will identified automatically when the current MaskCompose project is loaded.

CP When this option is checked the search will identify and return center point information for matching items. Center point data generally includes item placement information relative to the selected reference item.

HS When this option is checked the search will identify and return hot spot information for matching items.

Match String Type The match string type option has three possible values. (Device Type, Item Name, or Hot Spot) The search will interpret the entered match string differently depending on the specified type. For example if the type is set to Item Name then the database will be searched for items with names that match the entered search string. If however the type is Device Type then the database will be searched for items with the specified device type.

Match String The match string is used by the search operation to identify Items and/or hot spots that match the entered string. The asterisk ‘*’ character will be interpreted as a wild card and general regular expression syntax is also supported. Multiple values may be entered separated by commas.

Select Items The select items icon will provide a list of items, device types or hot spot names depending on the current match string type. The listed options are located automatically in the current project. Selection in the list will automatically fill in the search string.

Run The run icon will initiate the search and the results will be added to the results list.

October 2013 244 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 245: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualMaskCompose Tool

Results

The results table will list the any matching items or hot spots found from the last search operation. Clicking on one of the results in the table will automatically pan and zoom to the selected item in the Main Drawing Window. The following table identifies and describes the different results toolbar options.

Table 16-2 Results Toolbar Options

Option Description

Previous Steps to the previous result in the table.

Next Steps to the next result in the table.

Clear Results Clears the results table.

Save Results Save the results to a file that can be loaded at a later time to prevent the need to search the entire database.

Load Results Load a previously saved results file into the results table.

Option Display the stepper options.

Interrupt Interrupt the current results search or load operation.

October 2013 245 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 246: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualMaskCompose Tool

Stepper Options

Clicking on the options icon will display the stepper options.

Figure 16-5 MaskCompose Tool - Stepper - Options

The following table identifies and describes the different stepper options.

Table 16-3

Option Description

Pan/Zoom This option controls the pan and zoom behavior of the Main Drawing Window when an item is selected in the results table.

Scale The entered scale factor is automatically applied to the item size and position values in the results table as they are identified during a search or when the user clicks the apply values icon. This provides a convenient tool for adjusting the search results to match databases that are being drawn at a different scale in the Main Drawing Window.

October 2013 246 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 247: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualMaskCompose Tool

Offset X/Y The offset values are automatically applied to the item position values as they are identified during a search or when the user clicks the apply values icon. This provides a convenient tool for adjusting the search results to match databases that are being drawn with a different origin in the Main Drawing Window.

Table 16-3

Option Description

October 2013 247 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 248: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualMaskCompose Tool

October 2013 248 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 249: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

AEnvironment Variable Reference

This appendix provides a list of QuickView environment variables.

You will have occasion to use some of these variables as you initialize the product and adapt it to your specific needs. The more commonly used variables are also mentioned in earlier sections of this manual.

The following variable must be set before QuickView can be invoked:

■ K2_VIEWER_HOME points to a file system location where Cadence Design Systems products have been installed. It must be set before QuickView can be invoked.

The following variables are optional. They may be used to initialize QuickView functionality as indicated:

■ K2_(FORMAT)_VALUES can identify a file of saved MEBES, JEOL, Hitachi & Toshiba Parameter values. If it is set, the indicated file is used to initialize the format’s Parameter menus when processing begins. Otherwise the menus are initialized from a file k2mv.vales in your current working directory if there is such a file. Example: K2_MEBES_VALUES.

■ K2_(FORMAT)_DATA can identify a directory where a specific format’s data is found. If it is set, the format’s button on the Select Viewer Data menu can be used to position that menu to the indicated directory. Example: K2_GDS_DATA. This will work with the following formats: Chameleon, GDS, GL1, Hitachi, JEOL, LAFF, MEBES, OA, OASIS, SemiP10 & Toshiba.

The following variables are either not required or are automatically set for you. You may (re)set them as desired to adapt or customize QuickView and its user interface:

■ K2_STARTUP identifies a file startup.mac which QuickView accesses to obtain basic user interface definitions. The default value is $K2_VIEWER_HOME/Viewer/macros/startup.mac

If you wish to use a different startup.mac, you may reset this variable to point to it. For example: setenv K2_STARTUP xxx/yyy/my_startup.mac

October 2013 249 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 250: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEnvironment Variable Reference

■ K2_PRE_STARTUP and K2_POST_STARTUP allow you to customize the user interface by reading user-defined macros immediately before and/or after reading startup.mac.

You may set either or both of these variables to point to appropriate macros. A full pathname should be specified. For example: setenv K2_PRE_STARTUP ppp/qqq/pre_startup.mac

■ K2_MACROS and K2_<FORMAT>_MACROS (where format can be GDS, MEBES, CHAMELEON, HITACHI, JEOL, TOSHIBA or SP10) identify directories where QuickView can find macros which drive the tool and its user interface. The default locations are $K2_VIEWER_HOME/Viewer/macros and $K2_VIEWER_HOME/Viewer/format_macros. Example: K2_SP10_MACROS.

If you wish to customize the tool and its user interface by writing additional macros or by editing existing macros, you may reset any or all of these variables to point to additional or different directories where the new or revised macros can be found.

Important

As of QuickView 5.1.0, it is not recommended to have the K2_VIEWER_HOME/Viewer/macros directory in your K2_MACROS path. This directory and ~/.cds_quickview are automatically appended to the end of the K2_MACROS environment variable.

If you wish to capture and write macros while operating QuickView, you must have write access to the first directory listed for K2_MACROS.

The Macros menu which you can open by selecting Read Macro on the File pull-down of the Main Drawing window lists all files in the K2_MACROS directory or directories which end in .mac.

Note: Macros within these directories which end with “.init” are automatically executed at startup.

■ K2_PIXMAPS and K2_BITMAPS identify directories where fill pattern bitmaps and pixmaps are stored. The QuickView Color System uses the pixmaps and bitmaps to generate single-color and multi-color fill patterns. The default directories are $K2_VIEWER_HOME/Viewer/pixmaps and $K2_VIEWER_HOME/Viewer/bitmaps.

Important

As of QuickView 5.1.0, it is not recommend to use K2_PIXMAPS or K2_BITMAPS as the directory ~/.cds_quickview/custom_bitmaps is used for storing the pattern images.

October 2013 250 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 251: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEnvironment Variable Reference

■ K2_HELP may be used to override the help file directory. It points to a directory where there is a pdf file of the QuickView Manual. The default is $K2_VIEWER_HOME/Viewer/help.

■ K2_JOURNAL If this is set when the viewer starts up it will indicate in the console the name of a log file and the name of the directory it is in. This log file will not contain the lengthy initialization, but it will contain every command executed in a session.

■ K2_XSYNCH causes the viewer to initialize with X Synchronization turned on, which overcomes some PC X server problems when the viewer starts up. It is only on during initialization, then off during regular running, so it does not slow down the viewer.

■ K2_QV_CLASSIC, if set to any value, brings up the older Motif windowing system. This is introduced in 5.1.0 and is to assist in bridging any functionality gap that exists with the new Qt windowing system. This functionality can also be invoked by using the -classic flag on the command line.

Note: This functioanlity will exist as long as there is missing functionality in the Qt windows version of QuickView. Once this migration is done, this option will be removed.

■ K2_EDITOR, if set to any value, will open the Viewer with the Start Editor option available on the Tools pull-down menu. For more information see the associated chapter.

Note: The Editing functionality is introduced in 5.1.0 and is only available in the Qt (new) version of QuickView. It is not available in the “classic” viewer.

■ QV_HELP_DIR identifies the directory for help files, using the Info and Errors window.

October 2013 251 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 252: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualEnvironment Variable Reference

October 2013 252 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 253: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

BHot Key Reference

Hot keys allow you to use a single keystroke to perform operations which are otherwise performed on a menu with the mouse. Many hot keys have been coordinated to provide the same functionality within a command as when used alone.

This appendix deals with the set of hot key definitions which are supplied with QuickView. Refer to Hot Keys in Chapter 14, “System Operations,” if you wish to define additional or different hot keys.

Hot Keys by Tag

To bring up a current list of hot keys, type <shift> H in the main window. They are provided below to allow for easy reference.

Cel Instance Stat KEY b

Close All (Shift) X

Data Palette d

F-Key Macro Quit Recd (Control) q

F-Key Macro Record (Control) r

Find Center KEY n

Find Corner KEY c

Find Edge KEY e

Find Horiz Edge KEY h

Find Vert Edge KEY v

Fit Context Window (Shift) F

Fit Main Window KEY f

October 2013 253 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 254: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualHot Key Reference

Frame Visible Data l

Geometry Status KEY g

Hot Keys (Shift) H

Interrupt Escape

Intersection KEY i

Jump to MEBES j

Measure m

MEBES Status KEY (Shift) S

Menu Down Tab

Menu Up (Shift) Tab

Pan KEY x

Pan Down KEY Down Arrow

Pan Left KEY Left Arrow

Pan Right KEY Right Arrow

Pan Up KEY Up Arrow

Quit (Shift) Q

Re-read GDSII (Shift) G

Read Macro (Shift) M

Redraw Context Window (Shift) R

Redraw Main Window KEY r

Scroll to MEBES (Shift) J

Select Cell (Shift) C

Select Data s

Text Toggle t

View Depth Context Window (Shift) 0 ... 9

View Depth Main Window 0 ... 9

Zoom in +

Zoom out -

October 2013 254 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 255: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualHot Key Reference

Hot Keys by Letter

This list of hotkeys is sorted by letter for easy reference.

View Depth Main Window 0 ... 9

View Depth Context Window (Shift) 0 ... 9

Cel Instance Stat KEY b

Find Corner KEY c

Select Cell (Shift) C

Data Palette d

Pan Down KEY Down Arrow

Find Edge KEY e

Interrupt Escape

Fit Main Window KEY f

Fit Context Window (Shift) F

Geometry Status KEY g

Re-read GDSII (Shift) G

Find Horiz Edge KEY h

Hot Keys (Shift) H

Intersection KEY i

Jump to MEBES j

Scroll to MEBES (Shift) J

Frame Visible Data l

Pan Left KEY Left Arrow

Measure m

Read Macro (Shift) M

Find Center KEY n

Open Cell o

F-Key Macro Quit Recd (Control) q

October 2013 255 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 256: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualHot Key Reference

Quit (Shift) Q

Redraw Main Window KEY r

F-Key Macro Record (Control) r

Redraw Context Window (Shift) R

Pan Right KEY Right Arrow

Select Data s

MEBES Status KEY (Shift) S

Text Toggle t

Menu Down Tab

Menu Up (Shift) Tab

Pan Up KEY Up Arrow

Find Vert Edge KEY v

Pan KEY x

Close All (Shift) X

Zoom in +

Zoom out -

October 2013 256 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 257: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

CParameter Reference

This Appendix provides details related to the System, GDSII, OASIS, LAFF, GL1 and MEBES parameters. The parameters related to the other formats are similar and as with the parameters listed here assistance for individual parameters is available in the form of tool tips.

October 2013 257 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 258: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

System Parameters

The system parameters form is accessed using the “System” option under the Parameters pull down menu at the top of the main drawing window. The form has multiple pages of parameters designed to organized similar parameters by topic, purpose or function.

The Save As Default button on the bottom of each Parameters window will save the parameters for future sessions of QuickView. The parameters are saved in $home/.cds_quickview directory and they will be automatically applied each time the user starts a new QuickView session.

Crosshairs & Grid Parameters

Figure C-1 Crosshairs & Grid Parameters

Table C-1 Crosshairs & Grid Parameters

Parameter Description

Crosshairs Turns the crosshairs attached to the mouse pointer in the drawing windows on and off.

October 2013 258 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 259: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Drawing Grid Turns the drawing grid highlights in the drawing windows on and off.

Cursor Snap This parameter specifies the snap interval for the extended crosshair cursor and for the cursor position displayed in the top left corner of the drawing window. The value is specified in microns.

Finest grid for the windows

This value indicates the finest grid coordinate that will be marked with a highlight in the drawing window when the Drawing Grid is turned on.

Medium grid for the windows

This value indicates the medium grid coordinate that will be marked with a highlight in the drawing window when the Drawing Grid is turned on.

Coarse grid for the window

This value indicates the coarse grid coordinate that will be marked with a highlight in the drawing window when the Drawing Grid is turned on.

Top grid for the windows

This value indicates the grid coordinate that will be marked with a highlight in the top draw window when the Drawing Grid is turned on.

Table C-1 Crosshairs & Grid Parameters

Parameter Description

October 2013 259 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 260: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Data Inspection

Figure C-2 Data Inspection Parameters

Table C-2 Data Inspection Parameters

Parameter Description

Global Highlight Show Grid

When this option is checked or pressed the grid squares that have shapes drawn in them for the current Global Highlight databases will be drawn in the Main Drawing Window.

Global Highlight Grid Size

This slider value indicates the number of rows and columns the current drawing area will be divided into to determine the global highlight grid cell locations.

Fade Overlap Blitting Scale Factor

October 2013 260 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 261: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Drawing

Figure C-3 Drawing Parameters

Table C-3 Drawing Parameters

Parameter Description

Window Background Color

This parameter specifies the background color for the drawing windows (Black/White).

Window Font This parameter sets the font for the system drawn text elements in the drawing windows. These text elements include Instance Names, Text Values, and Markup etc.

Default Technology Auto Apply

When this parameter is set or checked the default technology will automatically be applied before a user defined technology definition is applied. This will set the display parameters for each layer to the default values preventing multiple technology definitions from unintentionally being combined for a specific database instance.

Default Technology Visibility

This parameter specifies the visibility value that each layer will be set to when the default technology is applied.

October 2013 261 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 262: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Default Technology Draw Mode

This parameter specifies the draw mode value that each layer will be set to when the default technology is applied.

Default Technology Text

This parameter specifies the text visibility value that each layer will be set to when the default technology is applied.

Cache Top Draw When this option is enabled the top draw image will be cached so that it does not need to be redrawn a second time when the user request subsequent top draws.

Draw Mode Auto Top Redraw

When this option is set or checked a redraw operation will be automatically requested when the user interacts with the Data Palette to modify the drawing attributes of individual layers.

Draw Mode Incremental Drawing

When this option is set or checked the drawing window will be refreshed incrementally during extended draw operations.

Pan Zoom Pan % This value indicates the amount that the window will pan when using the arrow hot keys.

Pan Zoom Zoom % This value indicates the amount that the window will zoom when using the +/- hotkeys or the scroll wheel on the mouse.

Pan Zoom Mouse Zoom

This option sets the direction considered when using the mouse to drag zoom boxes. You can specify either left to right for zoom in and right to left to zoom out (Horiz) or top to bottom for zoom in and bottom to top to zoom out (vert).

Table C-3 Drawing Parameters

Parameter Description

October 2013 262 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 263: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Measuring

Figure C-4 Measuring Parameters

Table C-4 Measuring Parameters

Parameter Description

Markup Clear Automatically

When this parameter is set or checked the measuring markup will be automatically cleared from the drawing windows when they are redrawn. If it is not set then the measuring markup will be persistent and it must be cleared using the clear highlights icon in the utilities toolbar.

Markup Show Values In Drawing Window

When this parameter is set or checked the measurement results will be drawn in the drawing window along with the standard measuring highlights.

Ruler Finest Tic This parameter specifies the unit of the finest tick mark displayed on the rulers when they are drawn in the drawing window.

Ruler Medium Tic This parameter specifies the unit of the medium tick mark displayed on the rulers when they are drawn in the drawing window.

October 2013 263 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 264: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Ruler Coarse Tic This parameter specifies the unit of the coarse tick mark displayed on the rulers when they are drawn in the drawing window.

Point Measure Snap To Figures

When this option is set or checked the ends of the selected point measure dimension lines will automatically snap to the nearest database figure.

Point Measure Figure Snapping Distance

This value specifies the minimum distance in pixels that the mouse point needs to be from a database figure in order for the point measure dimension line to automatically snap to it when the snap to figure parameter is set.

Point Measure Default Mouse Command

When this option is set or checked the middle mouse button will be set to automatically initiate a point measure operation when no other selection operation is being preformed. This will override the default quick measure commands that the middle mouse button is generally associated with.

Point Measure Display Distance

When this option is set or checked the distance or length of the dimension lines will be drawn in the drawing window.

Point Measure Display End Points

When this option is set or checked the coordinates of the dimension lines end points will be drawn in the drawing window.

Point Measure Direction

This parameter restricts the angle(s) at which a dimension line may be selected. This parameter is often used indirectly by other line based selection operations.

Multi Edge Measure Stepping

This option specifies the number of edges for which additional dimension values will be calculated and drawn below the multi edge measure markup. When the value is not set then a single additional dimension value for the total distance will be drawn below the multi edge measure markup.

❑ Any Angle: no restriction

❑ Octagonal: restricted to multiples of 45×

❑ Orthogonal: restriction to multiples of 90×

Table C-4 Measuring Parameters

Parameter Description

October 2013 264 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 265: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Mouse Buttons

Figure C-5 Mouse Button Parameters

.Table C-5 Mouse Button Parameters

Parameter Description

Pan Zoom Button Specifies the mouse button to be used for specifying a Pan Zoom request.

Command Execution Button

Specifies the mouse button that will be used to for selecting or specifying lines or regions in a selection operation.

Context Menu Button Specifies the mouse button that will display available contest menus.

October 2013 265 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 266: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Command Prompt Specifies the prompts and corresponding interactions given when a selection operation is initiated.

❑ MM/MR — mouse middle button to execute and mouse right button to cancel (Default)

❑ ML/MM — mouse left button to execute and mouse middle button to cancel

❑ ML/ML^^ — mouse left button to execute and mouse left button double-click to cancel

❑ MM/MM^^ — mouse middle button to execute and mouse middle button double-click to cancel

❑ MR/MR^^ — mouse right button to execute and mouse right button double-click to cancel

Double Click Specifies the maximum amount of time between subsequent clicks on a mouse button in order for them to be considered a “Double Click” event.

Common Configurations

Provides a mechanism to automatically set the preceding parameters based on a set of predefined common mouse button configurations. The Help ‘?’ button will give you a description of each option. The first button (3 Btn, Menu Right) is the default.

Table C-5 Mouse Button Parameters

Parameter Description

October 2013 266 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 267: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

System

Figure C-6 System Parameters

.Table C-6 System Parameters

Parameter Description

Forms Only One Form At A Time Can Be Up

When this parameter is set or checked only a single parameters form may be displayed at one time. Opening a different parameters form will cause the current one to be closed automatically.

Loop Commands Loop Until Explicitly Quit

When this parameter is set or checked measuring and selection operations will automatically Loop or restart until the user explicitly ends or exits them.

Stepper Maximum Steps In Stepper

This value indicates the maximum number of elements that may be added to a stepper when stepping items like text elements, cells instances, and geometries etc.

October 2013 267 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 268: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Units & Precision

Figure C-7 Units And Precision Parameters

Time-out After the indicated time

The parameters specifies the action that QuickView should take when the specified amount of time passes and the current QuickView session remains idle.

❑ Do Nothing

❑ Log Off (Exit)

❑ Idle (Release Licenses)

Data Browser Max Cells In Branch

As an optimization for performance this parameter will limit the number of child cells that will be displayed when a parent node is expanded in the data browser.

Table C-6 System Parameters

Parameter Description

October 2013 268 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 269: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

.Table C-7 Units & Precision Parameters

Parameter Description

Units & Precision Digits Of Precision

The number of digits after the decimal that will be considered when performing and displaying mathematical and measurement results.

Units & Precision Digits Units Of Measurement

In general all measurements and interactions are done in microns. This parameter will switch the units to nanometers where applicable.

Units & Precision Trim Trailing Zeros

When this parameter is set or checked trailing zeros will be removed from the results of mathematical and measurement results.

October 2013 269 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 270: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

GDSII Parameters

The data specific parameters forms are accessed using the corresponding option under the Parameters pull down menu at the top of the main drawing window. The forms have multiple pages of parameters designed to organized similar parameters by topic, purpose or function.

Although there are several different format specific parameters forms only the GDSII and MEBES parameters are highlighted here. In most cases the parameters from one format to the next are similar and tool tips are generally available for each option by holding the mouse pointer over the option.

The Save As Default button on the bottom of each Parameters window will save the parameters for future sessions of QuickView. The parameters are saved in $home/.cds_quickview directory and they will be automatically applied each time the user starts a new QuickView session.

Current Library

Figure C-8 Current Library Parameters

The Current Library page lists each open and loaded library for the associated format. When you have more than one library loaded, you can make one active or set it as the current lib by clicking on it in the list.

October 2013 270 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 271: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Library Depth

Figure C-9 Library Depth Parameters

In the Library Depth panel, you can set the hierarchical view depth for each of the libraries loaded. The left column of buttons sets the upper level cell hierarchy depth below which data will be drawn. The right column sets the lower level cell hierarchy depth above which data will be drawn. The lower level depth values can be set using the 0-9 hot keys. The depth for each database is indicated in the button associated with that database in the active databases tool bar.

October 2013 271 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 272: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Performance

Figure C-10 Performance Parameters

.Table C-8 Performance Parameters

Parameter Description

Drawing Detail/Speed This parameter will optimize drawing for detail or for speed.

Drawing Report Time To Redraw

When this parameter is set or checked the total time required to draw the current view will be reported in the Information And Errors window.

Library Cache Megabytes Per Library

This parameter specifies the number of megabytes QuickView can use to cache drawing data for each loaded database or library. The cache is used to improve drawing performance by limiting the amount of data that needs to be retrieved from the file system for subsequent redraws of the same viewing area.

Text This parameter specifies the amount of test elements that will be displayed in more global views of the data.

October 2013 272 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 273: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Read Preferences

Figure C-11 Read Preferences Parameters

.Table C-9 Read Preferences Parameters

Parameter Description

Index Files Auto Search

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will automatically search for existing index files when loading a database. If a valid index file is located the database will be automatically loaded using the identified index file.

Index Files Auto Create

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will automatically generate an index file for the a database if one does not exist when the data is loaded.

Index Files Load As Needed

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will incrementally load data from the index file as it is needed instead of loading the entire index file into memory. This can improve initial memory requirements but there may be an impact on drawing performance as data my need to be retrieved from the index file on the file system.

Index Files Use Drawing Cache

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will use the top draw image cached in the index file when top draws are requested instead of building a new top draw in the current session.

October 2013 273 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 274: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Index Files Index File Directory

This parameter specifies the name of the directory where index files will be located and/or created. This will be located in the same location as the loaded database(s).

Report Missing Cells When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will report missing cells in the Information and Errors window as they are identified while the database is being loaded.

Report Missing Cells As Errors

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will report missing cells as errors as they are identified while the database is being loaded.

Report Empty Cells When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will report empty cells in the Information and Errors window as they are identified while the database is being loaded.

Report Non-Orthogonal References

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will report non-orthogonal cells in the Information and Errors window as they are identified while the database is being loaded.

Report Fixed Length Record

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will report fixed length records that do not match the indicated record length in the Information and Errors window as they are identified while the database is being loaded.

Table C-9 Read Preferences Parameters

Parameter Description

October 2013 274 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 275: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

General

Figure C-12 General Parameters

.Table C-10 General Parameters

Parameter Description

Initialization Separate Layer And Data Type

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView separate each individual layer and data type combination into is own layer button in the Data Palette.

Initialization Open Top Cell After Reading

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will automatically identify and open the Top cell in the data base.

Initialization Draw Top Cell When It Is Opened

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will automatically initiate a top draw of the top cell when it is opened.

Initialization Instance layer Is Visible When Data Is Opened

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView set the instance layer to be visible when the database is opened.

Exceptions Support Heavily Overlapped AREF Cells

In some cases when a database has large numbers of overlapping AREF cells with only slight deviations in position it can be difficult to pick particular AREF figures. When this parameter is set or checked it will improve the users ability to work with these AREF figures but it may also impact drawing performance.

October 2013 275 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 276: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Exceptions Support Open Pgons And Two Point Rectangles

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will allow and interpret polygons that are not closed as well as rectangles that are represented using two points by drawing them as closed polygons.

Exceptions AREFS Are In general AREFs are implemented in an orthogonal fashion so that they can be interpreted and represented using a rows and columns with a specific dx/dy for each row. When a database has non-orthogonal AREFs each individual element will requires is own unique dx/dy. For performance reasons this parameters should be set to Orthogonal unless Any Angle AREF are included in the database.

Table C-10 General Parameters

Parameter Description

October 2013 276 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 277: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

GDS Tools

The GDS Tools window can be found under the Tools->GDSII pulldown on the Main Drawing Window. These tools are specific for GDSII Data.

Extract Data

Figure C-13 Extract Data Tool

The extract tool allows you to extract the current viewing cell to another GDSII database.

■ Output File

Specifies the name of the new GDSII file that will be created by the extract process.

■ Extract Window

When this option is enabled only the data in the specified window or area will be extracted to the new GDSII database. The extract window is specified using the Left, Bottom, Right, Top text fields. The window may automatically be entered by selecting the current viewing area or selecting directly in the drawing window.

■ Type

This option indicates how the extracted area will be processed.

October 2013 277 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 278: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

❑ Hierarchical will extract any cell referenced touching the extract window.

❑ Flat Clipped will flatten the hierarchy and extract any shapes in the extract window clipping them at the window boundary.

❑ Flat Unclipped will flatten the hierarchy and extract any shapes that touch the extract window.

Reports

Figure C-14 Reporting Tool

The top of this form has a series of buttons. The results of these commands are shown below:

■ Layer Report — Generate a list of layers for the current data in the Info and Errors Window. This report shows:

❑ The current library data file

❑ The current displayed (top) cell

❑ The cell’s boundaries (minimum and maximum X and Y values)

October 2013 278 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 279: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

❑ A list of the layers in the library including (where applicable):

❍ Layer name

❍ Layer number

❍ Layer data type

■ Cell Report — Generate a list of cells for the current data in the Info and Errors Window. This report shows:

❑ The current library data file

❑ The current displayed (top) cell

❑ The top cell’s boundaries (minimum and maximum X and Y values)

❑ A list of all the cells contained in the current library and their cell boundaries

❑ A list of the layers in the library (the same as for the Layer Report command)

■ Full Report — reports cell information to the Info and Errors window.

■ Area & Perim — Calculate and list the approximate total of the geometric area and perimeter of all layers for the current data in the Info and Errors Window.

■ Top Cell Rpt— Provides a layer report for each top cell in the database.

■ Cell Depth Ext — Sets the max depth in Top Cell to look for cells.

■ Cell Hierarchy

The cell hierarchy report will generate an ASCII tree report for the current GDSII database.

❑ If the output file option is enable, the specified ASCII file will be created containing the hierarchy tree.

❑ If the Start/Stop Depth option is enabled the hierarchy report will only report cells between the specified start and stop hierarchy depth levels.

❑ If the Report in Info & Errors option is enabled the report will be printed to the information and errors window.

■ Cell Instances/Placements

The cell instances/Placements report will generate a list of cell instances in the current viewing cell.

October 2013 279 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 280: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Figure C-15 Cell Instances/Placements - Reporting Tool

❑ If the Output File option is enabled the report will create the specified file containing the cell instances report.

❑ If the Start/Stop Depth option is enabled then the cell instances will only be reported if they occur on the specified set of hierarchy levels.

❑ If the Report In Info & Errors option is enabled the cell instances report will be printed to the information and errors window.

❑ The Cell Filter option will filter the report so that it only contains cell that are not listed or only the listed cells based on the state of the Reverse Filter option.

❑ The report can be formatted using either the Default, Delimited, or one of the custom report formats. The report is formatted by replacing the <tag> with the associated values extracted for each cell instance. The custom reports may be modified by the user by rearranging the <tags> and adding additional fixed content.

Table C-11 Cell Instance/Placements Formatting Tags

<Tag> Description

<lx> Left X boundary coordinate of the cell placement in the current viewing cell.

<by> Bottom Y boundary coordinate of the cell placement in the current viewing cell.

<rx> Right X boundary coordinate of the cell placement in the current viewing cell.

<ty> Top Y boundary coordinate of the cell placement in the current viewing cell.

October 2013 280 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 281: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

<cx> Center X coordinate of the cell placement in the current viewing cell.

<cy> Center Y coordinate of the cell placement in the current viewing cell.

<rot> Rotation of the cell placement in the current viewing cell.

<rfl> Mirroring/Reflection of the cell placement in the current viewing cell.

<mag> Scale/Magnification of the cell placement in the current viewing cell.

<ldx> Left X boundary coordinate of the cell as it is drawn.

<bdy> Bottom Y boundary coordinate of the cell as it is drawn.

<rdx> Right X boundary coordinate of the cell as it is drawn.

<tdy> Top Y boundary coordinate of the cell as it is drawn.

<cols> Number of array reference columns of the cell placement in the current viewing cell.

<dx> The center to center x spacing of one instance to the next in the array reference of the cell placement in the current viewing cell.

<dy> The center to center y spacing of one instance to the next in the array reference of the cell placement in the current viewing cell.

<ox> The X coordinate of the drawn origin of the cell placement in the current viewing cell.

<oy> The Y coordinate of the drawn origin of the cell placement in the current viewing cell.

<level> The hierarchy level of the cell placement in the current viewing cell.

<path> The hierarchy path of the cell placement in the current viewing cell.

Table C-11 Cell Instance/Placements Formatting Tags

<Tag> Description

October 2013 281 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 282: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

ASCII Dump- Export

Figure C-16 ASCII Data Dump - Export Parameters

The GDSII Data Dump feature allows you to create a text file representation of the current GDSII database. This form allows you to set options for the dump.

The options for the dump file are:

■ File: Enter/change the name of the output dump file or use the Finder to select one.

■ Dump to Info/Errors window: If you prefer, you can capture the dump text in the Info and Errors window rather than an external file.

■ Compress Output File: This option will compress the output file using gzip as it is being generated.

■ Only Dump Selected Cells: If not checked, QuickView dumps the whole file. If you set this option, you can specify the cells to dump. The list selection works as all others, allowing you to use the Shift and Control keys in conjunction with the left mouse button

October 2013 282 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 283: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

to select a range of cells or multiple individual cells respectively. You can use a combination of the techniques as well. The Filter field allows you to reduce the list to just the cell names you want to see. Enter a string using the asterisk (*) as a wildcard and click the List button to prune the list. The All button selects all the cells in the list.

■ Verbose Output: Normally, a comment indicating the byte location in the GDS file is included at the beginning of each new entity in the dump. Enabling this option tells QuickView to put a comment before each item of data indicating the item’s byte location and number of bytes.

■ User Unit Coords: Unsetting this causes QuickView to output the X/Y coordinates in the native integer values rather than the database/user units.

■ Export ASCII Data: Once you have all the options set as desired, click the Dump button to initiate the conversion. When it is complete, a dialog pops up tell you so. Click its Done button to remove it.

ASCII Dump - Import

Figure C-17 ASCII Data Sump Import Parameters

October 2013 283 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 284: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

If you have any QuickView GDSII dump files. you can convert them to GDSII format using the Import ASCII Data command in the Import table.

Specify the input dump file name and the output GDSII file name in the appropriate text fields or use the Finder to select an existing file for either.

If you wish to load the converted GDSII data in the viewer after it is converted, click the Auto Open GDSII check box.

To initiate the conversion, click the Import ASCII Data button.

Other

Figure C-18 Other Tools

■ Disambiguate Filled Pgons This option will draw each polygon with a different fill pattern an color so that they can be easily distinguished from one another. This is useful when viewing a single layer with a number of overlapping polygons.

October 2013 284 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 285: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

OASIS Parameters

The data specific parameters forms are accessed using the corresponding option under the Parameters pull down menu at the top of the main drawing window. The forms have multiple pages of parameters designed to organized similar parameters by topic, purpose or function.

The Save As Default button on the bottom of each Parameters window will save the parameters for future sessions of QuickView. The parameters are saved in $home/.cds_quickview directory and they will be automatically applied each time the user starts a new QuickView session.

Current Library

Figure C-19 Current Library Parameters

The Current Library page lists each open and loaded library for the associated format. When you have more than one library loaded, you can make one active or set it as the current lib by clicking on it in the list.

October 2013 285 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 286: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Library Depth

Figure C-20 Library Depth Parameters

In the Library Depth panel, you can set the hierarchical view depth for each of the libraries loaded. The left column of buttons sets the upper level cell hierarchy depth below which data will be drawn. The right column sets the lower level cell hierarchy depth above which data will be drawn. The lower level depth values can be set using the 0-9 hot keys. The depth for each database is indicated in the button associated with that database in the active databases tool bar.

October 2013 286 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 287: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Performance

Figure C-21 Performance Parameters

.Table C-12 Performance Parameters

Parameter Description

Drawing Detail/Speed This parameter will optimize drawing for detail or for speed.

Drawing Report Time To Redraw

When this parameter is set or checked the total time required to draw the current view will be reported in the Information And Errors window.

Memory Memory/Speed

This parameter will optimize memory for memory usage or for speed.

October 2013 287 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 288: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Read Preferences

Figure C-22 Read Preferences Parameters

.Table C-13 Read Preferences Parameters

Parameter Description

Index Files Auto Search

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will automatically search for existing index files when loading a database. If a valid index file is located the database will be automatically loaded using the identified index file.

Index Files Auto Create

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will automatically generate an index file for the a database if one does not exist when the data is loaded.

Index Files Index File Directory

This parameter specifies the name of the directory where index files will be located and/or created. This will be located in the same location as the loaded database(s).

Report Empty Cells When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will report empty cells in the Information and Errors window as they are identified while the database is being loaded.

Data Palette Sort Layers By

This option determines the default order that the layers will be displayed in the data palette.

October 2013 288 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 289: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

General

Figure C-23 General Parameters

.Table C-14 General Parameters

Parameter Description

Initialization Separate Layer And Data Type

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView separate each individual layer and data type combination into is own layer button in the Data Palette.

Initialization Open Top Cell After Reading

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will automatically identify and open the Top cell in the data base.

Initialization Draw Top Cell When It Is Opened

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will automatically initiate a top draw of the top cell when it is opened.

Initialization Instance layer Is Visible When Data Is Opened

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView set the instance layer to be visible when the database is opened.

October 2013 289 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 290: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Oasis Tools

The Oasis Tools window can be found under the Tools->OASIS pulldown on the Main Drawing Window. These tools are specific for OASIS Data.

Extract Data

Figure C-24 Extract Data Tool

The extract tool allows you to extract the current viewing cell to another OASIS database.

■ Output File

Specifies the name of the new OASIS file that will be created by the extract process.

■ Extract Window

When this option is enabled only the data in the specified window or area will be extracted to the new OASIS database. The extract window is specified using the Left, Bottom, Right, Top text fields. The window may automatically be entered by selecting the current viewing area or selecting directly in the drawing window.

■ Type

This option indicates how the extracted area will be processed.

❑ Hierarchical will extract any cell referenced touching the extract window.

❑ Flat Clipped will flatten the hierarchy and extract any shapes in the extract window clipping them at the window boundary.

October 2013 290 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 291: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Flat Unclipped will flatten the hierarchy and extract any shapes that touch the extract window.

October 2013 291 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 292: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

GL1 Parameters

The data specific parameters forms are accessed using the corresponding option under the Parameters pull down menu at the top of the main drawing window. The forms have multiple pages of parameters designed to organized similar parameters by topic, purpose or function.

The Save As Default button on the bottom of each Parameters window will save the parameters for future sessions of QuickView. The parameters are saved in $home/.cds_quickview directory and they will be automatically applied each time the user starts a new QuickView session.

Current Library

Figure C-25 Current Library Parameters

The Current Library page lists each open and loaded library for the associated format. When you have more than one library loaded, you can make one active or set it as the current lib by clicking on it in the list.

October 2013 292 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 293: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Library Depth

Figure C-26 Library Depth Parameters

In the Library Depth panel, you can set the hierarchical view depth for each of the libraries loaded. The left column of buttons sets the upper level cell hierarchy depth below which data will be drawn. The right column sets the lower level cell hierarchy depth above which data will be drawn. The lower level depth values can be set using the 0-9 hot keys. The depth for each database is indicated in the button associated with that database in the active databases tool bar.

October 2013 293 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 294: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Cache And Culling

Figure C-27 Cache And Culling Parameters

.Table C-15 Cache And Culling Parameters

Parameter Description

Cache Megabytes Per Library

This parameter specifies the number of megabytes QuickView can use to cache drawing data for each loaded database or library. The cache is used to improve drawing performance by limiting the amount of data that needs to be retrieved from the file system for subsequent redraws of the same viewing area.

Culling Level For The Main Window

The “culling” values tell the viewer what not to draw when zoomed out. Geometries that are small relative to the data view can be culled (not drawn). As you zoom in, culled geometries reappear. Higher values result in faster draw times because less data is drawn. Possible values range from 0 (no culling) to 10 (medium culling). The value extends to 17 which is high culling.

Culling Level For The Top Window

The “culling” values tell the viewer what not to draw when zoomed out. Geometries that are small relative to the data view can be culled (not drawn). As you zoom in, culled geometries reappear. Higher values result in faster draw times because less data is drawn. Possible values range from 0 (no culling) to 10 (medium culling). The value extends to 17 which is high culling.

October 2013 294 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 295: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Command Preferences

Figure C-28 Command Preferences Parameters

.

Drawing Smallest Window Size For Blitting

Indicates the smallest drawing area dimension, in microns, for which blitting is performed.

Reference Name Magnification

This parameter indicates the amount of text elements that will be culled from the view when zoomed out.

Table C-16 Command Preferences Parameters

Parameter Description

Open Top Cell/Object After Reading

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will automatically identify and open the Top cell in the data base.

Draw Top Cell/Object When It Is Opened

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will automatically initiate a top draw of the top cell when it is opened.

Instance layer Is Visible When Data Is Opened

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView set the instance layer to be visible when the database is opened.

Table C-15 Cache And Culling Parameters

Parameter Description

October 2013 295 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 296: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Read Preferences

Figure C-29 Read Preferences Parameters

Display Coordinates With Geom Status

When this parameter is set or checked additional coordinate information will be printed in the information and errors window when performing a geometry status.

Show Hierarchy With Instance Status

When this parameter is set or checked additional hierarchy information will be printed in the information and errors window when performing an instance status.

Support Heavily Overlapped AREF Cells/Objects

In some cases when a database has large numbers of overlapping AREF cells with only slight deviations in position it can be difficult to pick particular AREF figures. When this parameter is set or checked it will improve the users ability to work with these AREF figures but it may also impact drawing performance.

Alphamerics Only Visible With Layer On

When this parameter is set alphamerics text will only be displayed for a specific layer when that layer is visible.

Table C-16 Command Preferences Parameters

Parameter Description

October 2013 296 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 297: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

.Table C-17 Read Preferences Parameters

Parameter Description

Search For Index Files For Read

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will automatically search for existing index files when loading a database. If a valid index file is located the database will be automatically loaded using the identified index file.

Write Index After Read When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will automatically generate an index file for the a database if one does not exist when the data is loaded.

Load Index File Only As Needed

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will incrementally load data from the index file as it is needed instead of loading the entire index file into memory. This can improve initial memory requirements but there may be an impact on drawing performance as data my need to be retrieved from the index file on the file system.

Sub-Directory This parameter specifies the name of the directory where index files will be located and/or created. This will be located in the same location as the loaded database(s).

Report Empty Cells/Objects During Read

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will report empty cells in the Information and Errors window as they are identified while the database is being loaded.

Report Missing Cells/Objects During Read

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will report missing cells in the Information and Errors window as they are identified while the database is being loaded.

Report Missing Cells/Objects As Errors

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will report missing cells as errors as they are identified while the database is being loaded.

Report List Of Cells/Objects At Read Time

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will list all of the identified cells in the Information and Errors window as they are identified while the database is being loaded.

Report List Of Layers/Levels At Read Time

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will list all of the identified layers in the Information and Errors window as they are identified while the database is being loaded.

October 2013 297 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 298: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Alphameric Preferences

Figure C-30 Alphameric Preferences Parameters

.Table C-18 Alphameric Preferences Parameters

Parameter Description

Maximum Char Size Limits the maximum size of the alphameric characters.

Char Font Color Sets a single color for all alphamerics instead of using the associated layer color.

Precis marker Size Specifies the size of the bow tie origin markers.

Small Text Magnification

Specifies a scale factor for magnifying the alphamerics to keep them visible when zoomed out.

Disambiguate Text On A Point

When this parameter is on it separates all alphamerics placed on the same point by a small amount.

October 2013 298 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 299: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

LAFF Parameters

The data specific parameters forms are accessed using the corresponding option under the Parameters pull down menu at the top of the main drawing window. The forms have multiple pages of parameters designed to organized similar parameters by topic, purpose or function.

The Save As Default button on the bottom of each Parameters window will save the parameters for future sessions of QuickView. The parameters are saved in $home/.cds_quickview directory and they will be automatically applied each time the user starts a new QuickView session.

Current Library

Figure C-31 Current Library Parameters

The Current Library page lists each open and loaded library for the associated format. When you have more than one library loaded, you can make one active or set it as the current lib by clicking on it in the list.

October 2013 299 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 300: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Library Depth

Figure C-32 Library Depth Parameters

In the Library Depth panel, you can set the hierarchical view depth for each of the libraries loaded. The left column of buttons sets the upper level cell hierarchy depth below which data will be drawn. The right column sets the lower level cell hierarchy depth above which data will be drawn. The lower level depth values can be set using the 0-9 hot keys. The depth for each database is indicated in the button associated with that database in the active databases tool bar.

October 2013 300 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 301: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Cache And Culling

Figure C-33 Cache And Culling Parameters

.Table C-19 Cache And Culling Parameters

Parameter Description

Cache Megabytes Per Library

This parameter specifies the number of megabytes QuickView can use to cache drawing data for each loaded database or library. The cache is used to improve drawing performance by limiting the amount of data that needs to be retrieved from the file system for subsequent redraws of the same viewing area.

Culling Level For The Main Window

The “culling” values tell the viewer what not to draw when zoomed out. Geometries that are small relative to the data view can be culled (not drawn). As you zoom in, culled geometries reappear. Higher values result in faster draw times because less data is drawn. Possible values range from 0 (no culling) to 10 (medium culling). The value extends to 17 which is high culling.

Culling Level For The Top Window

The “culling” values tell the viewer what not to draw when zoomed out. Geometries that are small relative to the data view can be culled (not drawn). As you zoom in, culled geometries reappear. Higher values result in faster draw times because less data is drawn. Possible values range from 0 (no culling) to 10 (medium culling). The value extends to 17 which is high culling.

October 2013 301 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 302: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Command Preferences

Figure C-34 Command Preferences Parameters

.

Drawing Smallest Window Size For Blitting

Indicates the smallest drawing area dimension, in microns, for which blitting is performed.

Small Text Magnification

This parameter specifies a scale factor that will be applied to text so that it can be seen more easily when zoomed out.

Draw More Reference Names

This parameter will modify the number of reference names that will be drawn when zoomed out.

Table C-20 Command Preferences Parameters

Parameter Description

Open Top Cell/Object After Reading

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will automatically identify and open the Top cell in the data base.

Draw Top Cell/Object When It Is Opened

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will automatically initiate a top draw of the top cell when it is opened.

Table C-19 Cache And Culling Parameters

Parameter Description

October 2013 302 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 303: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Read Preferences

Figure C-35 Read Preferences Parameters

Instance layer Is Visible When Data Is Opened

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView set the instance layer to be visible when the database is opened.

Display Coordinates With Geom Status

When this parameter is set or checked additional coordinate information will be printed in the information and errors window when performing a geometry status.

Show Hierarchy With Instance Status

When this parameter is set or checked additional hierarchy information will be printed in the information and errors window when performing an instance status.

Support Heavily Overlapped AREF Cells/Objects

In some cases when a database has large numbers of overlapping AREF cells with only slight deviations in position it can be difficult to pick particular AREF figures. When this parameter is set or checked it will improve the users ability to work with these AREF figures but it may also impact drawing performance.

Read Signal Name Tokens

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will process any signal names found in the database.

Table C-20 Command Preferences Parameters

Parameter Description

October 2013 303 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 304: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

.Table C-21 Read Preferences Parameters

Parameter Description

Search For Index Files For Read

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will automatically search for existing index files when loading a database. If a valid index file is located the database will be automatically loaded using the identified index file.

Write Index After Read When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will automatically generate an index file for the a database if one does not exist when the data is loaded.

Load Index File Only As Needed

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will incrementally load data from the index file as it is needed instead of loading the entire index file into memory. This can improve initial memory requirements but there may be an impact on drawing performance as data my need to be retrieved from the index file on the file system.

Sub-Directory This parameter specifies the name of the directory where index files will be located and/or created. This will be located in the same location as the loaded database(s).

Report Empty Cells/Objects During Read

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will report empty cells in the Information and Errors window as they are identified while the database is being loaded.

Report Missing Cells/Objects During Read

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will report missing cells in the Information and Errors window as they are identified while the database is being loaded.

Report Missing Cells/Objects As Errors

When this parameter is set or checked QuickView will report missing cells as errors as they are identified while the database is being loaded.

October 2013 304 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 305: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

LEF/DEF Parameters

The data specific parameters forms are accessed using the corresponding option under the Parameters pull down menu at the top of the main drawing window. The forms have multiple pages of parameters designed to organized similar parameters by topic, purpose or function.

The Save As Default button on the bottom of each Parameters window will save the parameters for future sessions of QuickView. The parameters are saved in $home/.cds_quickview directory and they will be automatically applied each time the user starts a new QuickView session.

Current Library

Figure C-36 Current Library Parameters

The Current Library page lists each open and loaded libraries for the associated format. When you have more than one library loaded, you can make one active or set it as the current lib by clicking on it in the list.

October 2013 305 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 306: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Performance

Figure C-37 Performance Parameters

.Table C-22 Performance Parameters

Parameter Description

Drawing Detail/Speed This parameter will optimize drawing for detail or for speed.

Drawing Report Time To Redraw

When this parameter is set or checked the total time required to draw the current view will be reported in the Information And Errors window.

October 2013 306 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 307: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Read Preferences

Figure C-38 Read Preferences Parameters

.Table C-23 Read Preferences Parameters

Parameter Description

Init File Editor This option provides access to the LEFDEF Init File Editor by clicking on the ‘...’ button.

Missing Routing Information

Reports any missing routing information in the Information & Errors Window.

October 2013 307 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 308: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

LEFDEF Init File Editor

Figure C-39 LEFDEF Init File Editor

LEFDEF data can be loaded directly into QuickView by selecting any individual LEF or DEF file. However when related LEFDEF files need to be combined they are loaded using a LEFDEF init file which lists the different LEF and DEF files that need to be loaded as well as the order in which to load them.

The LEFDEF Init File Editor provides a convenient set of tools for organizing the input LEF and DEF files and generating a corresponding LEFDEF init file which can be used to load the LEFDEF project into QuickView.

The toolbar at the top of the window provides the basic set of actions required for working with LEFDEF init files. The following table lists and describes each of the available toolbar options.

.Table C-24 LEFDEF Init File Editor Toolbar Options

Toolbar Icon Description

Open Open an existing init file for editing.

October 2013 308 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 309: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

New Create and open a new init file for editing.

Save Save the current edits.

Save As Save the current init file as a new init file.

Load/Check Load the current init file into QuickView.

Add Add a new LEF/DEF file.

Delete Remove the selected LEF/DEF file.

Move UP Move the selected LEF/DEF file up in the load order.

Move Down Move the selected LEF/DEF file down in the load order.

Parameters Show the selected LEF/DEF file properties panel.

Table C-24 LEFDEF Init File Editor Toolbar Options

Toolbar Icon Description

October 2013 309 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 310: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Pattern and Job Deck Parameters

QuickView provides parameters for job deck parsing and for pattern and job deck viewing. These parameters provide flexibility in handling patterns and job decks.

General parameters for most of the non-layout data (patterns, job decks, Chameleon stored layers, etc.) can be set using the M Ch H J T Params command found in the Main Drawing window Parameters pull-down menu.

Parameters, where necessary, for specific pattern formats other than MEBES can also be found in this menu: Hitachi Parameters, JEOL Parameters, etc. These commands pop up forms which are shown and described below.

The Parameters -> MEBES menu in the Main Drawing window contains options commands for MEBES patterns and job decks. They pop up forms that will be shown and described below.

This menu also contains the commands for saving and loading the parameter settings applicable to MEBES patterns and job decks. This includes the current settings of all the forms for commands in the M Tools menu.

■ Save Option Values — Writes the current MEBES settings to the file ./k2mv.values.

■ Restore Opt Values — Reads the k2mv.values in the current directory and applies the values to all the MEBES parameters.

■ Restore Opt Values ... — Pops up a Finder to allow you to locate and select a k2mv.values file which is then read and values applied.

Many of them correspond to run-time parameters of a MEBES or CORE writing system.

MEBES parameters appear on four menus--the Draw Options menu, the Job Parse Options menu, the Job Pattern Directories menu, the Job Title Options menu. You can open these menus from the M Tools pull-down of the Main Drawing window.

October 2013 310 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 311: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

M Ch H J T Parameters

Figure C-40 M Ch H J T Parameters

The primary purpose of the M Ch H J T Params command form, is to allow you to set the initial drawing mode for patterns and Chameleon stored layers.The letters stand for:

■ M – MEBES

■ Ch – Chameleon stored layers

■ H – Hitachi

■ J – JEOL

■ T – Toshiba

The options for Limit or MCR: Initial visibility and Geometric data: Initial visibility are the same: existing default, visible & not visible. These options allow you to define the settings in the Data Palette for pattern data when it is read.

The options for Initial Outline or Fill, like the two above, allow you to set your personal preference for the draw settings when the pattern data are read and first displayed. The options are existing default, fill our outline.

The options for Assign default colors give you a choice to assign default colors for each format or across formats

October 2013 311 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 312: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Hitachi Parameters

Figure C-41 Hitachi Parameters

The Hitachi (HL800) parameters provides the following options.

The Hitachi Pattern Dirs parameters provides a mechanism to specify directories where QuickView should look for Hitachi pattern data when loading a jobdeck.

Table C-25 Hitachi General Parameters

Parameter Descriptions

Long Exposure Names Specifies the long exposure name abbreviation scheme.

Report Time To Redraw Specifies that the redraw time details will be printed in the Information & Errors window.

LDF Text Scale Factor Scale factor applied to LDF Text

October 2013 312 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 313: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

JEOL Parameters

Figure C-42 JEOL Parameters

The JEOL Parameters command pop up provides the following parameters for patterns:

■ For long exposure data names, use — first chars or last chars

Choose the option that will provide the most unique names.

Pattern preparation is a process of analyzing JEOL pattern data and building data structures that streamline the top-level draw and drawing distant (zoomed out) views. The time it takes to perform pattern prep is about the same as to draw the full data. However, once the pattern prep has been done, high-level drawing happens almost instantly. The options you have are:

■ Do Pattern Prep: Yes/No

■ Save the Result: Yes/No

October 2013 313 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 314: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

■ Sub-directory: this text field allows you to enter the name of the sub-directory where you want to save the results. This directory must reside in the same location as the original files.

It provides you with the following Chip Size/Field Draw Options:

■ Show Color per field: Yes/No

■ Show Position-set locations: Yes/No

And it provides the following options for JEOL job decks:

■ Missing Patterns — Warning or No Report

■ Unresolved P() or A() — Warning or No Report

■ At First Error — Continue or Stop

October 2013 314 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 315: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

MEBES General Options Parameters

Figure C-43 MEBES General Options

There are a number of Pattern, Pattern Preparation, Pattern Draw and Job Deck Draw Options available on this menu.

October 2013 315 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 316: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Pattern Options:

■ For Drawable Non-standard Patterns: Warning or No Report

Pattern preparation is a process of analyzing MEBES pattern data and building data structures that streamline the top-level draw and drawing distant (zoomed out) views. The time it takes to perform pattern prep is about the same as to draw the full data. However, once the pattern prep has been done, high-level drawing happens almost instantly.

The Pattern Preparation Options allow you to choose if, how & when the viewer does pattern prep for different large size patterns. The following options are available for Large (1 MB-100 MB), Larger (100 MB-250 MB) and Largest (over 250 MB) patterns:

■ Do Pattern Prep: At Data Selection, Not At All, & At First Draw

■ Save The Result: Yes/No

■ Sub-directory for Save, Automatic Retrieve: allows you to enter the name of the sub-directory where this data is stored. This directory must reside in the same location as the original files.

In the Pattern Draw Options section you can turn on the E-beam Spot Mode by clicking its toggle button so that it is checked and indicates yes to its right. Click it again to turn it off.

The Smallest Interval To Draw (pixels) field indicates how small the spot circles can be before they are not drawn as you zoom out. The smaller the number, the smaller the spots circles will appear in more distant views.

The next two lines apply to the use of the Stripes/Fields/Frames draw settings.

The STR lines show line has two list selection buttons. The first lets you select from

❑ stripes

❑ 1024 au (address units) scans

❑ 2048 au scans

❑ 4096 au scans

The second list selection button allows you to choose to view

❑ segments

❑ no segments

The second Smallest Interval To Draw (pixels) field works just like the first specifying how small the stripes can be before they are not drawn.

October 2013 316 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 317: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

The remaining Draw options pertain to job decks only:

■ Level Culling Of Full View: Yes/No allows you to turn culling on or off for the full view.

■ Group Color/Fill provides flexibility when viewing job decks which have GROUP commands. If this option is in effect, grouped levels all use the draw attributes of the level which defines the group.

Pattern Blitting is the process of writing a pattern image using a block transfer. In essence, this means that all instances of a pattern are drawn at the same time rather than redrawing the pattern for each instance. Generally, allowing pattern blitting (setting the toggle to yes) makes the jobdeck draw faster.

Overlap Default for MEBES applies to cases where die patterns are arrayed with a step distance (pitch) in X of less than the width of the die. This causes adjacent die instances to overlap which can lead to inaccuracy when writing the mask. The three options represent the techniques to overcome this problem.

❑ Double Fetch: draw the data unique to the left instance; fetch, combine and draw the data for the common/overlapped area; draw the data unique to the right instance. The stepping distance must be an integer multiple of the address unit.

❑ Arbitrary Overlap: ignore the left instance part that overlaps the right instance.

❑ Draw Data As Is: same as Double Fetch except the stepping distance is ignored.

October 2013 317 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 318: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Job Parse Options

Figure C-44 Job Parse Options

October 2013 318 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 319: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

The Job Parse Options command form provides settings for general and MEBES and CORE-specific options. They affect job deck parsing and in some cases supply default values which supplement information obtained from a job deck.

Job Parse Options (General) apply to both MEBES and CORE

■ Missing Patterns controls the QuickView response when patterns referenced by a job deck cannot be found.

Error means that all patterns must be present or the parse will fail.

Warning means that a warning is issued when a pattern cannot be found but the parse does not fail.

No Report means that the parse continues and no warning is issued.

■ Address Mismatch controls the QuickView response when pattern address size does not match the address size specified in a job deck.

Error means that the pattern address size for all patterns must match the job deck address size if the pattern is found.

However, if virtual addressing is specified, the job deck address size may be either the same as the pattern address size or exactly twice the pattern address size. This variance is allowed because a job deck may provide the net writing address required for virtual addressing either by doubling the address size or by adjusting the scale factor.

Warning means that a warning is issued when address size mismatch occurs but the parse does not fail.

No Report means that the parse continues and no warning message is issued

■ At First Error allows you to stop a parse command at the first reported error or to let errors accumulate if possible.

■ Identify Levels By allows you to identify job deck levels in the Data Palette by level number or by M Title. If by M Title, you may further specify that the left or right part of a title should be used if the title is too long to fit the menu. A level which has no M Title is always identified by its number.

■ Acceptable Net Writing Address is useful for detecting a net writing address which lies outside an allowable range or outside a desired range. Specify the Smallest and Largest allowed.

The default minimum and maximum values (0.01 and 1.1 microns) represent the usual allowable range. You may provide different values.

■ Report Excluded Commands/Options allows you to control the reporting of job deck commands and options which MEBES or CORE do not use.

October 2013 319 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 320: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

MEBES accepts all commands except OFID which it ignores.

CORE excludes a number of commands which are not relevant. It treats some excluded commands as errors. Others trigger warning messages or are simply ignored.

This option directs QuickView to report unused commands: If Error, If Error Or Warning, or In Each Case.

Job Parse Options (MEBES)

■ Slice Type is equivalent to E-beam parameter MPARAM2:31.

Standard Processing means that job deck SLICE codes are interpreted as type I (standard) slice codes with no implied circular array limit.

Die Limit Implied means that job deck SLICE codes are interpreted as type II (die limit implied) slice codes. Each slice code implies a circular array limit and may indicate a substrate size different from an identical type I slice code.

■ Default PFP Grid Factor is equivalent to E-beam parameter MPARAM2:110.

If a job deck specifies multi-phase printing but does not specify a grid factor, this value is used when the parse checks the net writing address. When the job deck is drawn, it may also be used if Double Fetch is in effect.

Job Parse Options (CORE)

■ Remap Level Numbers directs the CORE job deck translation to remap job deck level numbers into the range 1 to 50. If this option is selected, fifty different level numbers may be present in a job deck. Otherwise only level numbers in the range 1 to 50 may be present.

The CORE parse commands do not actually remap level numbers. They merely determine whether or not the level numbers which occur would be acceptable to a CORE system.

■ Suppress ORIENT Commands directs the parse rules to discard all job deck Orient commands.

■ Suppress SLICE Command directs the parse rules to discard the job deck Slice command. When this happens, the Default Plate Size (see below) replaces the Slice Code specified in the job deck.

■ Supply OPTION M supplies job deck OPTION M (mirror) for every job deck level that does not already have it.

■ Supply OPTION R supplies job deck OPTION R (reverse tone) for every job deck level that does not already have it.

October 2013 320 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 321: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

■ Supply OPTION T supplies job deck OPTION T (title mirror) for every job deck level that does not already have it.

■ Default Plate Size allows you to select one of twelve listed plate sizes. This value is used in place of a Slice Code when the Suppress SLICE Command option (see above) is selected.

■ Default Address Size allows you to specify an address size to be used when no address size is specified in a job deck.

■ Default Scale Factor allows you to specify a scale factor to be used when no scale factor is specified in a job deck.

■ Apply CORE System Defaults forces all option values to their default state.

Job Pattern Directories

The Job Pattern Dirs command form allows you to build a list of directories through which the viewer will search for pattern files specified in MEBES job decks.

Each path line in the form contains three buttons to the left of the Path field:

■ Select — Pops up a directory finder (files are not listed and cannot be selected) from which you can choose a directory. The selected directory path is put in the Path field for that line.

■ Delete — Removes the current Path entry on that line and puts the directory path in the Deleted Path field at the bottom of the form. This overwrites any current directory path in the Deleted Path field.

■ Retrieve — Copies the directory path currently in the Deleted Path field and puts it in the line’s Path field. (It does not remove the path from the Deleted Path field.)

The combination of Delete and Retrieve allow you to shuffle the order of paths in the list.

When a job deck is read, the viewer searches for the pattern files in this order:

■ In the current directory:

❑ with the file name in upper case, then in lower case

❑ compressed (.gzip or .Z) with the file name in upper case, then in lower case

■ In each of the Job Pattern Directories form entries in the order they appear for the file in the same order as above

October 2013 321 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 322: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

Job Title Options

Figure C-45 Job Title Options

There are two Job Title Options command forms; MEBES and CORE. While many of these settings can be specified in the job deck itself, they may be left out to default to the settings of the e-beam machine being used. This form allows you to set values that mimic the e-beam machine’s defaults.

The upper section has either MEBES title options or CORE label options on the right. The lower half of the form contains options specific to MEBES and CORE formats respectively.

■ Title Location Options in the upper portion of the menu specify X and Y values for seven title types and 13 slice codes or plate sizes.

The option button near the top of the menu area selects a slice code or plate size. The text fields allow you to view and set values. The text fields are linked to the value of the option button. All values are in microns relative to the lower left corner of the plate.

October 2013 322 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 323: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

■ Title Orientation Options in the upper portion of the menu specify rotation, character rotation, justification, and mirror values for eight title types. Values apply to all slice codes and plate sizes.

To set values, highlight a title type line with ML and press appropriate buttons at the bottom of the menu area.

■ N Title text can be set in the lower portion of the menu.

On the E-beam it is not necessary to supply a text since the N Title text is the master serial number, which is known. The master serial number consists of up to 9 digits with an optional one digit suffix. The N Title is drawn if a D, M, I, S or J title is drawn.

■ P Title text can be set in the lower portion of the menu.

On the E-beam it is not necessary to supply a text since the P Title text is the program and machine configuration, which is known. The text is a string of 25 or 26 characters. The P Title is drawn if a D, M, I, S or J title is drawn.

■ T Title has no options. The text consists of 15 characters giving the day, month, year, hour and minute. The T Title is drawn if a D, M, I, S or J title is drawn.

■ J Title values can be set in the lower portion of the menu.

You can provide a text of up to 40 characters for the J Title. You can also specify magnification and job deck level. The J Title is drawn at your request.

The options below supply information which a CORE system would obtain from a jcltrans.cfg run-time parameter file or from system defaults.

■ Label Location Options in the upper left portion of the menu specify X and Y values for six title types and 12 plate sizes.

The option button a near the top of the menu area selects a plate size. The text fields allow you to view and set values. The text fields are linked to the value of the option button. All values are in microns relative to the lower left corner of the plate.

■ Label Height values can be viewed and set in the upper portion of the menu. The default character height is 1152 microns for human readable titles and 512 microns for the S Title. Values apply to all plate sizes.

■ Label Length values can be viewed and set in the upper portion of the menu. The default label length is 30 characters for human readable titles and 60 characters for the S Title. Values apply to all plate sizes.

■ Label Justification and Label Rotation values can be viewed and set near the middle of the menu. Values apply to all plate sizes and title types.

■ N Title values can be set in the lower portion of the menu.

October 2013 323 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 324: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualParameter Reference

The N Title is drawn at your request. When you specify that the title should be drawn, the text is also displayed in the menu.

The text consists of the sequential plate number with an optional prefix and/or suffix. You may specify a length for the plate number and a prefix and/or suffix string. The default plate number length is 5 characters. The prefix and suffix are limited to 15 characters each.

■ P Title values can be set in the lower portion of the menu.

The P Title is drawn at your request. When you specify that the title should be drawn, the text is also displayed in the menu.

The text consists of the hardware version, the machine id and the software version. You may specify a length for each component. The default lengths are 11, 13 and 11 characters respectively.

■ T Title values can be set in the lower portion of the menu.

The T Title is drawn at your request. When you specify that the title should be drawn, the text is also displayed in the menu. The default text length is 18 characters.

■ Apply CORE System Defaults sets all CORE Label options to the values which are used by a CORE system if values are needed but not supplied in a jcltrans.cfg file.

October 2013 324 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 325: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

DContext Menu Reference

QuickView 5.1.0 introduces Main Context Menus in the Main Drawing window to replace the Tracking Menus that were found on the right side of previous versions of QuickView. Moving to a context menu system helps because it allows more space for the drawing window and it allows QuickView to only display commands that are applicable to the currently selected database.

Note: The old Tracking Menus have been converted to text toolbars in 5.1.0. These toolbars can be loaded form the View->Toolbars pull-down on the Main Drawing Window.

Current Item Selection

The context menus described in this section will vary based on the database that is selected. Also, the some of the commands that are executed from the context menu are specific to the database that is selected (i.e. Close will close the currently selected database.

For layout formats, the currently selected database is shown on the bottom status bar with red box around the name. It is also displayed in the window header. There are four ways to set an item as current:

■ Click on the DBs name in the bottom status bar

■ Select the DBs header in the data palette

■ Selecting the item from the list in the Main Drawing context menu

■ Selecting the DB from the associated Parameters window.

For Manufacturing formats, a new menu is added to the context menu and will persist until you close QuickView.

Main Drawing Context Menus

You can bring up the Main Drawing context menu by right clicking anywhere in the Main Drawing window.

October 2013 325 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 326: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualContext Menu Reference

Note: If the cursor is in a selection mode the right click will exit the mode and another right click will bring up the context menu.

Below is an image of the Main Drawing Context Menu.

Figure D-1 Main Drawing Window Context Menu

Global Menus

There are two base menus that can be found at the top of all Main Drawing Context menus:

■ Current DB menu - This menu displays the Current DB in the base menu and lists all of the loaded layout DBs in the sub-menu. Any actions called from the context menu that are specific to a selected DB will be applied to the item listed in the base menu (i.e. Close will close this DB). If multiple layout DBs are loaded, you can make it the current DB by selecting it from the sub-menu.

Note: If not Layout DBs are loaded, the menu title will be No Current Data.

■ Measure menu - The measure menu exists for all files loaded in to QuickView and has the following options:

❑ Measure provides a general purpose measurement command which uses hot keys to modify the measurement locations: Edge - e, Horizontal edge - h, Vertical edge - v, Corner - c, Inter section -i, and Center - n. The intersection detection also locates corners and projections where the distances are short, and the intersecting edges are nearest to the location selected. In measuring from an edge to a corner, the report shows a DX, DY, and distance. The center of the edge is used for this calculation.

October 2013 326 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 327: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualContext Menu Reference

❑ One Edge marks one of the specified format’s edges in the Main Drawing window and reports its location and length. Select an edge when prompted.

❑ Two Edges marks two of the specified format’s edges in the Main Drawing window and reports the smallest horizontal, vertical or diagonal separation. If they intersect, the intersection is reported, otherwise the center is reported. Select edges when prompted. This can be done as 2 clicks of the mouse curser of a down, drag, up.

❑ One Corner marks one of the specified format’s corners in the Main Drawing window and reports its location. Select a corner when prompted.

❑ Two Corners marks two of the specified format’s corners in the Main Drawing window and reports the separation distance and center. Select corners when prompted.

❑ Find Center marks the center of the specified format’s figure in the Main Drawing window and reports its location. Select a figure when prompted.

❑ Intersection marks the point where two non-parallel edges in the Main Drawing intersect or would intersect if extended. Select the point closest to the intersection of the two edges.

❑ On/Off Loop toggle sets the measurement commands to loop unless marked off.

❑ Point Measure marks two drawing points in the Main Drawing window and reports the distance between them without regard to the underlying data. select points when prompted.

Data Specific Menus

Layout Formats

The remaining menus on the context menu are specific to the format of data loaded. For Layout formats, there are three base menus:

■ Data - This menu has the following option that can vary based on the format ofr the database:

❑ Change Cell - This loads the Select Cell window for the current DB.

❑ Close - Closes the current DB.

❑ Write Index (if applicable) - Writes an Index file for the current DB.

■ Status - this menu has the following options:

October 2013 327 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 328: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualContext Menu Reference

❑ Geom (Geometry Status) - queries a layout database geometry in the Main Drawing window. It marks the geometry and reports the layer, figure type and cell the geometry is contained in.

❑ Instance (Instance Status) - queries a cell instance in the Main Drawing window. It marks the extent of the cell and its center and reports the cell name and center location. Select a reference when prompted. It also queries the hierarchy of the cell instance. It reports the cell hierarchy information, including cell names, cell locations, rotation, reflection, and magnification.

❑ Figure Status marks one of the specified format’s trapezoid, pattern limit or substrate limit in the Main Drawing window and reports a description of it. in the Information and Errors window. Select a trapezoid or limit when prompted.

■ Display - This menu has the following options:

❑ Cell (Cell Display) - provides a form to select cell instances for highlight or for the stepper. It also provides for a region query.

❑ Layer (Layer Display) - provides a form to select layers for highlight or for the stepper. It provides for a region query.

❑ Text (Text Display) - provides a form to select text by name for highlight or for the stepper. It also provides for a region query.

❑ Text on Layer - provides a form to select text on a particular layer for highlight or for the stepper. It also provides for a region query.

❑ Edge Stepper - allows you to find all of the edges of a selected polygon. This moves you through the edges step by step.

❑ Inst Property - provides a form to select instances according to their attached properties for highlight or for the stepper. It also provides for a region query.

❑ Geom Property - provides a form to select geometries according to their attached properties for highlight or for the stepper. It also provides for a region query.

❑ Polygon Ident - allows a user to determine what polygons are inside a region query or what polygons cover a point. If a region is provided, the tool will search for polygons that intersect or are contained by the region. If a point is given, the tool will search for which polygons intersect or contain the point. These are two different searches. A user can access this procedurally to obtain all vertices within a region.

❑ Clear Highlights clears any highlight marquis on the data.

❑ Clear Stepper clears any highlight marquis on the data that was created by a stepper.

October 2013 328 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 329: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualContext Menu Reference

❑ Show Stepper opens the stepper window

Manufacturing Formats

When you load Manufacturing Data, you will get a new base menu for every format. These menus will remain until you close QuickView. The menus that are available are the following:

■ MEBES - This menu contains the following options:

❑ Measure commands as explained with the exception that they only work on MEBS patterns.

❑ Color Per Instance provides distinct colors for each job deck pattern instance in the Main Drawing window display upon redraw in either window.

❑ Color Per Pattern provides distinct colors for each job deck pattern in the Main Drawing window display upon redraw in either window.

❑ Select Instances adds a list of job deck pattern instances to the Data Palette draw list so that you can assign individual or different draw attributes to them. Drag a rectangle in the Main Drawing window to select pattern instances when prompted.

❑ Select Patterns adds a list of job deck patterns to the Data Palette draw list so that you can assign individual or different draw attributes to them. Drag a rectangle in the Main Drawing window to select patterns when prompted.

❑ Cancel Patterns / Instances cancels the Color Per Instance, Color Per Pattern, Select Instances and Select Patterns commands upon redraw.

❑ Trapezoid Step - opens the Trapezoid Stepper window.

❑ Job Patt Step - opens the Job Pattern Display window.

❑ Job CHIP Step - opens the Job CHIP DIsplay window.

❑ Trap Extract - Creates a list of the points of the trapezoids in a selected window.

■ JEOL - This menu contains the options as explained in the above sections with the exception that they only work on JEOL data.

■ TOSHIBA - This menu contains the options as explained in the above sections with the exception that they only work on TOSHIBA data.

■ HITACHI - This menu contains the options as explained in the above sections with the exception that they only work on HITACHI data.

■ CSL (Chameleon Stored Layers) - This menu contains the options as explained in the above sections with the exception that they only work on CSL data.

October 2013 329 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 330: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualContext Menu Reference

October 2013 330 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 331: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference Manual

EMacro Reference

This appendix lists some of the more common macros which are distributed with QuickView. Refer to product notes for information about new macros.

Some of the macros are also described in earlier sections of this manual. Others apply only in specialized situations. Some are not fully functional as released but are provided as templates which can be adapted to particular tasks or circumstances.

All macros use the standard QUEL™ format. When editing QUEL macros, it is important to observe the proper use of parentheses, commas and semi colons.

The following macros appear in the Macros menu under the heading $K2_VIEWER_HOME/Viewer/macros.

Note: For QV 5.1.0 the macro list has been cleaned up. If there are macros that you use that aren’t in the 5.1.0 release send an E-mail to [email protected]. For migration purposes, all of the old macros are still available using the -classic flag.

■ alignment_control: opens the Alignment Control window.

October 2013 331 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 332: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualMacro Reference

Figure E-1 Alignment Control Macro

You can use his window to align a MEBES pattern and one or more GDSII layers if the extent of the pattern and the layer(s) are the same. Mirror/Reflection, Rotation and Magnification attributes, if necessary, should be set before using the Alignment Control window

■ dbconvert will convert a loaded database into another database format. The conversion is done using the MaskCompose <db>2<db> conversion utilities and a MaskCompose license is required.

The steps for performing a conversion are:

❑ Select the db to convert.

❑ Specify the output file path.

❑ If available specify the layer mapping file path.

❑ Specify the output format.

Example layer map file (Name Layer DataType):

Met1 6 0

Via1 9 2

Met2 7 0

October 2013 332 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 333: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualMacro Reference

■ dbmerge will merger one or more loaded databases of similar format into a single database. The data merge is done using the MaskCompose <db>merge conversion utilities and a MaskCompose license is required.

The steps for performing a merge are:

❑ Select the dbs to merge.

❑ Specify the output file path.

❑ Specify the top cell name.

❑ Run the merge application.

■ mdpv - The Manufacturing Data Preparation and Verification (MDPV) utility is designed to provide access to tools external to QuickView for the purposes of data inspection, verification, and manipulation. It provides access to features that are typically found in a DRC and/or fracturing tool. These features do not reside natively in QuickView and this utility provides a link between QuickView and one or more external engines to accomplish these tasks. For more information see the MDPV reference manual available on SourceLink.

■ default_hot_keys: This macro is read at startup to provide a set of default hot key definitions. See Appendix B, “Hot Key Reference,” for the list of default hot keys.

■ hot_key_utility: This macro opens the Hot Key Utility window. You can use the Hot Key Utility window to add, modify or delete hot key definitions.

October 2013 333 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 334: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualMacro Reference

Figure E-2 Hot Key Utility

■ hot_keys: This macro opens the Hot Keys window which displays a list of currently defined hot keys. It is accessed through hot key <Shift> H.

■ measure_to_file writes measurements into a window that can be saved to a file.

■ point_list: allows you to name points and go to them in an automated way. See the QuickView Point List manual on SourceLink.

■ replay: This macro allows you to rapidly save and replay favorite QUEL commands.

The replay macro also allows you to incrementally load portions of a macro identified by a pair of named tokens found in the macro file marking the start and end of a block of code.

The token syntax is:

//%#B <token name>...lines of macro code//%#E <token name>

Where //%#B marks the start of the code block, and //%#E marks the end of the code block.

The replay macro will scan macro files added to the list for any defined tokens in the file. When you double-click a token name in the list, replay will read the code block of the macro file that are found between the start and end tokens.

■ startup: This macro, which is identified by the environment variable K2_STARTUP, is automatically read when QuickView is invoked.

October 2013 334 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 335: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualMacro Reference

Certain types of customization can be accomplished by modifying this macro or by setting K2_STARTUP to point to a modified copy of the macro.

■ startup2: is only provided as information to QUEL developers.

■ vkeys adds a subset of the Virtuoso bind keys to the QuickView hotkey list. This macro adds/modifies the following hotkeys:

❑ b - Ascend from Cell

❑ x - Descend into Cell

❑ n - Diagonal selection

❑ j - Find Center

❑ z - Zoom in

❑ Z - Zoom out

❑ a - Cell Instance Status

❑ A - Geometry Status

❑ k - Point Measure

❑ K - clear measure markups

■ Density Map Tool: This macro, will allows you to perform a graphical calculation to determine the relative shape density for different portions of the displayed data in the current viewing area.

The calculation is performed by dividing the current viewing area into an even number of grid cells. The relative shape density is computed by counting the number of shapes the are contained or touch each cell in the grid. After the shape counts are determined each grid cell is assigned a color representing the relative shape density of each cell in the gird.

The Density Map tool is accessed using the option Read Macro option under the File menu in the Main Drawing Window.

October 2013 335 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4

Page 336: QuickView Reference Manualemaskview.pkl.co.kr/native/QuickView_manual.pdf · 2014. 3. 27. · Unless otherwise agreed to by Cadence in writing, this statement grants Cadence customers

QuickView Reference ManualMacro Reference

Figure E-3 Density Map Tool

October 2013 336 Product Version 12.1.1 HF4